THE  CROSS  AND 
THE  HAMMER 

A  Tale  of  the  Days  of  the  Vikings 

By  H.  BEDFORD-JONES 


PUBLISHED  BY 

DAVID  C.  COOK  PUBLISHING  Co. 
ELGIN,  ILLINOIS 


COPYRIGHT,  1912. 

By  DAVID  C.  COOK  PUBLISHING  Co., 
ELGIN,  ILLINOIS. 


CONTENTS. 


I.  How  THE  Vow  WAS  MADE         .             .             .  7 

II.  THE   SHOOTING  MATCH             .            .            .            .  11 

III.  JARL  HAKON  OF  NORWAY             ....  14 

IV.  THE  RESCUE  IN  THE  BAY           ....  18 
V.  THE  ESCAPE  FROM  THRANDHEIM             ...  20 

VI.  HIORUNGA  BAY               .....  25 

VII.  How  VAGN  KEPT  His  Vow         .  .28 

VIII.  "  SKOAL  TO  KING  OLAF  !"....  33 

IX.  How  ASTRID  FARED  FORTH  36 

X.  FAREWELL  TO  DUBLIN                 ....  39 

XI.  AT  ETHELRED'S  COURT               ....  42 

XII.  THE  FLIGHT  FROM  LONDON        ....  47 

XIII.  ALFRED  OF  MERCIA        ...  .50 

XIV.  IN  BRETLAND                  .....  53 
XV.  IN  WINTER  QUARTERS                ....  56 

XVI.  AN  AMBUSCADE               .....  60 

XVII.  KETIL  TURNS  UP            .....  63 

XVIII.  A  MISSION  FOR  THE  KING          .  66 

XIX.  AT  KING  SVEIN'S  COURT            ....  68 

XX.  THE  KING  AND  THE  TOWEL        ....  73 

XXI.  THE  DEATH  OF  HAKON               ....  76 

XXII.  THE  SACRIFICE  TO  THOR             ....  79 

XXIII.  How  THE  CHIEFS  WERE  BAPTIZED          ...  83 

XXIV.  OLAF'S  ATONEMENT        .....  86 
XXV.  THE  WRESTLING  MATCH            ....  89 

XXVI.  THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER  92 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER.' 


FOREWORD. 


THIS  is  a  story  about  the  very  real  peo- 
ple and  events;   if  ever  you  chance 
to   read    the   old    Sagas    of   Norway 
you  will  come  upon  most  of  the  characters 
of  this  tale.    The  viking  age  was  not  Chris- 
tian, it  was  full  of  the  clash  of  arms  and  of 
unknightly   deeds,   yet   its   story   is   vitally 
interesting. 

The  Hammer  of  Thor,  the  War-god  of 
northern  Europe,  did  not  yield  to  the  Cross 
of  Christ  without  a  struggle,  and  the  story 
of  Norway's  conversion  is  intensely  dra- 
matic. King  Hakon  the  Good,  a  foster-son 
of  the  English  King  Athelstan,  was  forced 
to  recant  his  faith  in  order  to  hold  his 
throne;  King  Olaf  Triggveson  lost  his 
kingdom,  or  rather  gave  it  up,  at  Svolde 
Sound,  because  he  refused  to  do  the  like; 
and  King  Olaf  the  Thick,  who  followed 
him,  fell  beneath  the  heathen  weapons  of 
his  subjects,  becoming  the  patron  saint  of 
Norway. 


It  was  the  first  King  Olaf  who  broke  the 
power  of  the  old  gods  and  who  introduced 
Christianity  into  his  realm.  Short  as  was 
his  reign,  he  was  the  greatest  king  Norway 
ever  had.  He  built  the  first  church  in  the 
land,  and  sent  the  first  missionaries  to  Ice- 
land; during  his  reign  Thangbrand,  the 
priest,  won  that  island  to  the  true  faith. 

Many  of  the  incidents  narrated  are 
taken  direct  from  the  Sagas,  and  although 
King  Olaf  is  said  to  have  died  at  Svolde, 
the  story  of  his  escape  is  well  authenti- 
cated; I  give  his  own  words  in  refusing  to 
win  back  his  kingdom.  He  went  to  Rome 
and  the  Holy  Land  and  held  rule  there 
under  the  Crusader  Kings  of  Jerusalem, 
dying  fifty  years  later.  King  Edward  the 
Confessor  used  to  have  the  story  of  his  life 
chanted  to  his  court  once  every  year,  upon 
his  death  being  reported  in  England  during 
that  king's  reign. 

H.  BEDFORD- JONES. 


NOTES. 


"bonders." — This  word  is  used-  in  the 
Sagas  to  represent  the  free  farmers  of 
Norway,  who  held  their  lands  from  the 
king,  or  owned  them;  they  were  subject 
only  to  the  orders  of  the  king  or  his  Jarls, 
and  are  equivalent  to  our  own  "  farmers," 
except  that  they  had  special  rights  and 
privileges. 

"scat." — A  fine  or  any  other  penalty 
which  might  be  imposed  on  an  offender  by 
an  assembly  of  the  people.  The  scat  was 
usually  a  fine  of  money,  lands,  or  goods. 

"skoal." — This  plain  word  corresponds 
to  our  own  "  Hurrah  !"  It  means  both  long 


life,  good  health,  and  joy,  and  is  still  used 
in  Norway  in  that  sense. 

I  have  avoided  the  use  of  many  words 
which  are  usually  retained  in  the  transla- 
tions of  the  old  Sagas.  Nearly  all  the  facts 
about  which  the  story  of  Sigurd  Fairhair  is 
woven  are  historical,  and  are  taken  from 
the  Heimskringla,  and  the  Saga  of  King 
Olaf  by  the  Abbot  Berg  Sokkason.  Both 
histories  were  compiled  from  the  accounts 
of  eye-witnesses  of  the  events  contained 
therein,  to  a  great  extent,  and  especially 
was  this  true  with  the  life  of  Olaf  Triggve- 
son.— The  Author. 


The   Cross  and  the  Hammer 


A   Tale  of  the  Days  of  the   Vikings 


By  H.  BEDFORD-JONES 


CHAPTER  I. 

HOW  THE  VOW  WAS  MADE. 

THE  great  hall  of  the  Danish  kings  at 
Leira  was  filled  to  overflowing  on  this 
autumn  evening  of  the  year  994,  for 
King  Harald  Gormson  had  fallen  in  battle 
some  weeks  before,  and  his  son  Svein 
Twyskiegge,  of  Forkbeard,  was  celebrating 
his  accession  feast  in  the  hall  of  his  fathers. 

Around  the  town  lay  a  whole  city  of 
tents  and  brush  huts,  for  besides  the  Danish 
lords  present,  sixty  ships  had  come  from 
Jomsborg,  bearing  the  noblest  of  the  famous 
Viking  brotherhood,  under  their  chiefs  Jarl 
Sigvald  and  Bui  the  Thick.  Visitors  and 
Danes  were  clad  in  their  bravest  array,  and 
both  town  and  camp  presented  a  scene  of 
the  gayest  festivity. 

Within,  the  hall  was  hung  with  ancient 
arms  and  trophies  of  the  chase,  the  floor 
was  strewn  with  a  thick  layer  of  fresh 
rushes,  and  the  long  tables  were  heaped 
high  with  dishes.  At  one  end  of  the  hall 
sat  King  Svein,  with  his  chiefs  and  the 
Jomsborg  nobles,  while  above  them  towered 
the  high-seat  or  throne  of  the  king;  along 
the  hall  were  ranged  the  vikings  and  men 
of  Denmark,  with  Queen  Gunhild  and  her 
ladies  sitting  at  the  far  end. 

Servants  flitted  in  and  out,  bearing  food 
and  horns  of  ale,  while  in  the  center  of  the 
hall,  between  the  tables  and  before  the  seat 
of  the  king,  sat  two  skalds,  singing  to  the 
music  of  their  harps  the  great  deeds  of 
King  Harald  and  of  his  son,  the  new  king. 


Presently,  as  the  hunger  of  the  throng  was 
somewhat  appeased,  all  began  to  wonder 
what  vow  the  king  would  make,  for  it  was 
the  custom  that  at  the  heirship  feast  the 
new  king  should  make  a  vow  to  do  some 
great  and  noble  deed. 

Seated  near  Queen  Gunhild  as  guests  of 
honor  were  two  boys,  one  fair  and  ruddy- 
cheeked,  the  other  darker  and  with  very 
quick,  bold  eyes.  The  latter,  Vagn  Akison, 
was  a  nephew  of  Bui,  the  Jomsborg  chief, 
and  grandson  of  Palnatoki,  the  founder  of 
the  viking  brotherhood;  although  he  was 
only  seventeen,  he  and  his  cousin  Sigurd 
were  already  well  known  for  the  prowess. 

Sigurd  Fairhair,  who  was  a  year  younger 
than  Vagn,  was  in  high  spirits  to-night,  for 
a  little  before  King  Svein  had  given  him  a 
very  fine  sword,  and  he  was  proud  of  it. 

Glancing  over  at  him  with  a  smile, 
Queen  Gunhild  said,  "  Sigurd,  have  you 
shown  Astrid  your  new  sword?" 

"  Of  course  he  has,"  replied  Astrid,  her 
niece,  who  sat  beside  Sigurd,  and  her  dark 
eyes  gleamed  with  fun.  "  He  is  going  to 
try  its  edge  on  the  big  pine  tree  near  the 
harbor  to-morrow !" 

At  this  sally  a  laugh  went  up,  and  Vagn 
cried,  "  Be  careful  not  to  bring  down  the 
tree  into  the  harbor,  Sigurd !  It  would  be 
a  pity  to  sink  all  our  best  ships !" 

Sigurd  reddened,  and  retorted,  "  Well,  I 
never  aroused  the  whole  camp  just  because 
a  pig  was  wandering  around  in  the  bushes  !" 

This  turned  the  laugh  on  his  cousin,  who 
had  wakened  the  camp  the  night  before, 


8 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


mistaking  a  pig  for  a  spy,  and  even  the 
Queen  joined  heartily  in  the  merriment. 

Suddenly  a  silence  fell  on  the  tables,  for 
King  Svein  had  arisen  and  was  holding  in 
both  hands  a  great  silver  bowl.  Amid  a 
dead  hush  he  drained  it,  handed  it  to  an  at- 
tendant, and  stepped  to  the  high-seat. 
Grasping  an  arm  of  this,  the  king  turned. 

"  Here,  as  I  ascend  the  throne  of  my  fa- 
ther Harald,  I  vow  that  with  the  help  of 
God  I  will  lead  my  fleet  to  the  land  of  Eng- 
land, and  ere  three  winters  have  passed  I 
will  chase  King  Ethelred  from  the  land  and 
sit  in  his  throne !" 

As  King  Svein  took  his  seat  a  low  mur- 
mur of  astonishment  ran  around  the  hall, 
followed  by  a  tremendous  shout  of  "  Skoal ! 
Skoal !"  for  this  was  a  great  vow  to  be 
fulfilled. 

"  See  how  pale  the  Queen  is,"  whispered 
Astrid  to  Sigurd.  "  The  vow  must  have 
surprised  her  also." 

Indeed,  Queen  Gunhild  had  turned  white, 
for  the  King's  vow  meant  that  a  great  war 
would  be  undertaken,  and  how  it  would  end 
no  man  could  tell.  Before  Sigurd  could 
reply,  Jarl  Sigvald  arose  and  called  for 
silence. 

"  Men  of  Denmark  and  Jomsborg,"  he 
said  slowly,  in  his  deep  voice,  the  light 
glinting  on  his  dark,  strong  face  and  black 
eyes,  "  I  also  would  make  a  vow,  and  no 
light  one.  As  you  all  know,  Jarl  Hakon, 
a  heathen  man  and  doubly  a  traitor,  rules 
Norway  while  the  rightful  king,  Tryggvee's 
son,  is  a  wanderer  or  mayhap  dead.  This 
then  is  my  vow :  that  I  go  to  Norway  ere 
three  winters  pass,  take  the  rule  from  the 
hands  of  Jarl  Hakon,  and  drive  him  from 
the  land." 

Sigvald  sat  down,  amid  a  dead  hush  of 
amazement;  but  it  was  broken  by  a  shout 
from  young  Vagn  Akison. 

"  Skoal,  Jarl  Sigvald,  skoal !" 

Then  what  a  cheer  went  up !  Ere  it  sub- 
sided, Sigvald's  brother,  Thorkel  the  Tall, 
leaped  to  his  feet  and  swore  to  follow  the 


Jarl;  Bui  the  Thick  joined  him,  and  amid 
fresh  cheers,  Vagn,  from  the  other  end  of 
the  hall,  cried : 

"  I,  too !  And  ere  I  return  I  will  slay 
Thorkel  Leira,  the  villian  who  betrayed  my 
father  to  his  death !" 

"  Skoal !"  shouted  Sigurd,  excitedly, 
"  I'm  with  you,  Vagn  !" 

As  the  tumult  subsided,  the  Queen  looked 
at  Vagn  and  Sigurd  sadly.  "  You  are  rash 
boys,  you  two !  Do  you  realize  what  blood 
and  tears  these  oaths  will  cost?" 

Sigurd  answered  her  respectfully. 
"  Noble  Gunhild,  that  may  well  be;  yet  Jarl 
Hakon  is  an  evil  man  and  a  pagan,  as  is 
Thorkel.  At  any  rate,  I  won't  have  to  try 
my  new  sword  on  the  tree,  now !"  His 
keen  gray  eyes  twinkled. 

The  Queen  made  no  reply,  however,  and 
sat  watching  King  Svein;  but  Astrid 
whispered : 

"  I  think  that  was  splendid !  I  wish  I 
could  go,  too !" 

Vagn  laughed.  "  You'd  be  a  fine  one ! 
Why,  the  first  war-horn  would  send  you 
down  below  trembling !" 

"  It  wouldn't  either !"  retorted  the  girl 
indignantly.  "  I  can  shoot  better  than  you 
or  Sigurd,  either  of  you !" 

"  Good !  I  challenge  you  to  a  match  to- 
morrow," cried  Sigurd.  "  We'll  go  over  to 
the  shore  beyond  the  harbor,  where  no  one 
will  interrupt,  and  if  you  best  either  of  us 
I'll  give  you  my  trained  falcon  from 
France !" 

"Then  look  out,"  laughed  Astrid,  "be- 
cause I'm  going  to  win  the  bird  to-morrow 
morning !" 

With  this  she  arose  and  followed  the 
Queen,  who  was  leaving.  The  two  boys, 
not  wishing  to  join  in  the  carouse  that  most 
of  the  vikings  would  keep  up  for  the  better 
part  of  the  night,  also  left  the  hall  and  pro- 
ceeded to  their  own  tent. 

"  What  think  you  of  these  vows, 
Sigurd?"  asked  Vagn,  as  they  went  along. 

"  Well,  now  that  we  have  cooled  down, 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


I  will  lead  my  fieri  to  Hie  land  of  England." 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


11 


it  looks  rather  different,"  replied  Sigurd, 
thoughtfully.  "  It  is  one  thing  for  King 
Svein  to  conquer  England,  with  the  re- 
sources of  a  realm  at  his  command,  and  an- 
other for  Sigvald  to  conquer  Norway  with 
only  the  brother  of  Jomsborg  behind  him." 

"  But  remember,  Fairhair,  we  are  Chris- 
tians, while  Hakon  is  a  pagan  and  a  traitor ; 
that  will  make  some  difference,  surely ! 
My  own  vow  was  no  hasty  thing;  I  must 
avenge  my  father's  death  or  else  be  dis- 
graced forever." 

Sigurd  nodded  thoughtfully,  for  he  well 
knew  that  the  fierce  vikings  would  yield 
small  obedience  to  a  man  who  appeared  un- 
able to  avenge  the  betrayal  of  his  father. 
As  they  turned  in  at  their  tent,  a  man 
ran  up,  and  Vagn  recognized  one  of  Bui's 
men  in  the  moonlight. 

"Hello,  Egil,  what  is  it?" 

"  You  and  Sigurd  are  wanted  at  council 
in  Jarl  Sigvald's  big  tent,"  panted  the  man. 

Without  delay,  the  boys  followed  him  to 
the  large  tent  of  the  Jarl.  Here  they  found 
all  the  Jomsborg  leaders  assembled,  and 
took  their  places  beside  Bui  of  Bornholm, 
who  was  speaking  as  they  entered. 

"  It  was  a  rash  vow,  Sigvald,  but  we 
cannot  back  out,  and  it  may  well  be  that 
we  shall  win  great  honor  in  the  effort,  win 
or  lose.  Our  vikings  are  the  best  warriors 
in  the  world  to-day,  and  we  will  at  least 
give  a  hard  battle  to  Hakon  and  his  son 
Eirik." 

A  murmur  of  assent  ran  around  the 
tent,  and  Sigvald  arose. 

"  Brothers,  I  was  over-hasty  in  the  vow, 
but  it  cannot  be  helped.  This  is  my  coun- 
sel ;  that  since  the  attempt  must  be  made, 
we  make  it  without  delay,  send  for  the  rest 
of  our  men,  and  strike  at  Norway's  capital 
without  delay.  What  think  you?" 

Vagn  stepped  forward.  "  I  will  answer 
for  my  father's  ships  and  men.  Let  us 
strike  before  Hakon  can  meet  us;  we  have 
the  pick  of  our  men  here,  with  most  of 
our  ships.  We  can  leave  here  at  the  end  of 


the  week,  wait  at  Limafiord  for  the  rest  of 
our  men,  then  sweep  up  to  Thrandheim." 

"  Good  for  you,  Vagn !"  cried  his  uncle. 
"  Men  say  that  I  am  somewhat  stout,  but 
my  friends  never  complain  of  my  weight  in 
battle !"  Everyone  laughed,  for  although 
Bui  deserved  his  nickname,  he  was  one  of 
the  greatest  warriors  of  the  day.  "  I'll  let 
Sigurd  here  go  with  you,  if  you  want  him," 
he  continued,  and  the  boy's  heart  leaped 
with  joy,  for  this  was  indeed  just  what  he 
did  want. 

Jarl  Sigvald  smiled.  "  Then  is  it  agreed 
that  we  go  from  here  to  Limafiord  on  the 
fourth  day?" 

"  Yes  !"  The  answer  was  accompanied 
by  a  clash  of  weapons,  as  the  chiefs  struck 
sword  and  spear  on  shield,  and  the  council 
was  over,  although  most  of  the  leaders  re- 
mained to  talk  over  details  and  despatch 
a  messenger  to  Jomsborg  at  once. 

The  boys  returned  to  their  tent,  however, 
and  as  they  dropped  off  to  sleep  the  shouts 
of  "  Skoal !  Skoal !"  drifted  faintly  to  them 
from  the  town,  and  they  knew  that  the 
vikings  and  the  Danes  were  still  making 
vows,  some  of  which  they  would  bitterly 
repent  in  the  morning. 


CHAPTER  II. 

THE  SHOOTING-MATCH. 

EARLY   next   morning   the   boys   were 
afoot,  and  after  a  hasty  breakfast  be- 
side a  camp  fire  they  took  their  bows 
and  quivers  and  started  for  town. 

Astrid  lived  with  Queen  Gunhild  at  the 
Kings'  Hall,  and  thither  they  directed  their 
steps.  Early  as  it  was,  the  place  was 
thronged  with  servants,  who  were  laying 
fresh  rushes  in  the  hall  and  putting  the 
place  in  order  for  the  day.  Seeing  a  house- 
carl  pass,  with  his  clipped  hair  and  golden 
collar,  Sigurd  called  him  and  sent  him  to 
ask  if  the  Lady  Astrid  was  ready. 


12 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


Five  minutes  later  Astrid  herself  ap- 
peared, bearing  bow  and  quiver,  and  joined 
them  with  a  cheery,  "  Good-morning,  my 
vikings !  Has  your  rash  resolution  cooled 
off  yet?" 

"  Small  chance  of  that,"  replied  Vagn, 
his  half-grave,  half-humorous  eyes  lighting 
up  in  a  quick  smile. 

"  My  falcon  is  ready  to  change  owners," 
added  Sigurd,  "  but  then  there  is  no  chance 
for  that  to-day,  of  course." 

"  Oh,  indeed !"  Astrid's  dark  eyes 
flashed  gayly.  "  That  remains  to  be  seen, 
my  lord  of  Jomsborg  and  Bornholm !" 

Talking  and  laughing,  they  started  off, 
leaving  the  town  behind  and  cutting  across 
the  fields  to  the  harbor.  There,  as  they 
came  to  the  brow  of  the  hill,  they  paused. 
Far  below  lay  the  great  fleet,  the  sixty 
Jomsborg  ships  and  those  of  the  assembled 
Danish  lords,  their  shield-rims  glittering  in 
the  morning  sun,  their  dragon-prows  and 
high  carved  sterns  gilded  or  painted  in 
bright  array. 

Astrid  caught  her  breath  in  admiration. 
"  Oh,  how  wonderful  it  is  to  be  a  viking ! 
I  wish  I  were  a  boy !" 

The  other  two  laughed.  "  It  is  not  so 
very  wonderful,"  smiled  Sigurd.  "  I  think 
it  is  hard  work.  Every  morning  the  drill- 
ing and  practice  in  arms,  the  weapons  to  be 
rubbed  up — and  the  rowing !  Whew,  my 
back  hurts  even  to  think  of  those  low, 
heavy  oars !" 

"  There's  our  ship,  with  the  gilded 
prow,"  pointed  Vagn,  to  a  large  long-ship 
apart  from  the  rest.  "  Sigurd  talks  a  lot 
about  work,  but  he  is  equal  to  any  man  in 
the  fleet  with  sword  and  shield,  save  his  fa- 
ther, or  the  Jarl — " 

"  Or  yourself,"  broke  in  his  cousin  quick- 
ly. "  However,  let's  get  on ;  I'm  anxious  to 
decide  the  fate  of  my  falcon." 

They  left  the  road,  and  after  walking 
two  or  three  miles,  came  out  on  a  lonely 
stretch  of  shore,  wild  and  rocky.  Vagn  had 
brought  an  old  wooden  shield  with  him,  and 


he  set  this  up  as  target  on  a  large  rock  a 
hundred  feet  distant. 

"  Do  you  shoot  first,"  ordered  Astrid. 
"  I'll  go  next,  then  Vagn." 

Sigurd  nodded,  and  selected  an  arrow. 
Stringing  his  bow,  he  laid  the  shaft  and 
pulled  the  string  to  his  ear.  Twang !  The 
arrow  was  buried  deep  in  the  shield,  just 
above  the  center  boss  of  iron. 

"  Good  enough !"  cried  Vagn,  running 
forward,  but  Astrid  only  smiled  and  raised 
her  bow.  The  string  twanged,  and  an  an- 
swering echo  came  back  as  the  arrow 
glanced  off  and  the  shield  fell  backward. 

"Hurrah !"  cried  Vagn,  picking  it  up. 
"  Full  on  the  iron  boss !  But  you  can't  do 
it  again !" 

Sigurd  ran  forward  to  see.  also,  and  as 
they  examined  the  shield,  a  sudden  cry 
startled  them.  Turning,  they  saw  Astrid 
struggling  with  three  men,  while  more  ap- 
peared coming  from  behind  a  corner  of 
the  cliff. 

"  Norsemen  and  spies !"  exclaimed 
Sigurd,  and  without  an  instant's  hesitation 
he  picked  up  Astrid's  arrow  and  ran  for- 
ward, fitting  it  to  his  bow. 

"  Your  sword !"  called  Vagn,  tearing  the 
peace-bands  from  his  own  weapon  as  he 
ran.  A  shout  answered  him,  and  the 
Norseman  ran  forward  to  meet  Sigurd.  A 
spear  whizzed  by  his  head,  and  he  loosed 
the  bow. 

The  foremast  viking  fell  with  a  clash, 
and  as  the  others  paused  Sigurd  tore  the 
peace-bands  from  his  sword.  Next  in- 
stant he  was  surrounded,  struggling, 
striking,  and  he  realized  that  more  and 
more  men  had  appeared  from  behind  the 
cliff. 

Now  a  blade  gleamed  beside  him,  and 
Vagn's  voice  sounded  in  his  ear.  One  man 
was  down — two;  but  others  filled  their 
places,  and  a  heavy  axe  was  poised  over 
Sigurd.  As  it  fell  the  boy  darted  in  be- 
neath the  blow,  and  his  sword  fell  on  the 
viking's  shoulder;  but  at  that  instant  some- 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


13 


thing  crashed  on  his  light  steel  cap,  and  he 
knew  no  more. 

Sigurd  awoke  with  a  dull  pain  in  his 
head,  to  find  his  arms  tightly  bound  and  the 
midday  sun  beating  down  on  him.  Rais- 
ing his  head,  Fairhair  saw  that  he  lay  on 
the  forecastle  of  a  small  ship,  with  Vagn 
beside  him,  wounded  in  the  shoulder  and 
unconscious. 

He  saw  nothing  of  Astrid,  and  a  burning 
thirst  consumed  him;  with  a  great  effort  he 
rose  to  a  sitting  position  and  looked 
around.  They  were  out  at  sea,  and  the  land 
lay  far  behind  them ;  in  the  stern  and  waist 
of  the  ship  were  fifteen  or  twenty  Norse- 
men. 

"  That  was  a  stiff  crack  I  gave  you,  lad, 
but  the  steel  cap  saved  your  skull,"  sounded 
a  voice,  and  Sigurd  twisted  around.  Be- 
hind him  stood  a  dark  man  with  an  unpleas- 
ant face  and  straw-colored  hair;  evidently 
he  was  the  leader,  for  he  had  just  come  out 
of  the  cabin. 

Sigurd  tried  to  speak,  but  his  tongue  was 
dry,  and  the  man  laughed.  "  Here,  Thord," 
he  called,  "  bring  a  horn  of  water." 

One  of  the  men  in  the  waist  took  a  horn 
and  filled  it  from  the  cask  beside  the  mast, 
handing  it  up  to  the  leader,  who  put  it  to 
the  boy's  lips.  Sigurd  drank  greedily,  and 
then  the  other  threw  a  few  drops  over 
Vagn,  who  opened  his  eyes. 

He  struggled  to  rise,  with  a  sharp  cry. 

"Thorkel  Leira !  I—"  The  effort  was 
too  much  for  him,  and  he  fell  back  again. 
Their  captor  smiled  sneeringly. 

"  He  is  in  a  bad  way  to  fulfill  his  vow, 
eh?"  This  was  the  man  whom  Vagn  had 
sworn  to  kill,  the  betrayer  of  his  father ! 
As  he  realized  this,  Sigurd's  head  cleared. 

"  Why  have  you  attacked  us  ?  Who  are 
you?"  he  asked  indignantly. 

Thorkel  laughed  again.  "  Vagn,  there, 
seemed  to  know  my  face !  You  two  and  the 
girl,  whom  I  take  to  be  Gunhild's  niece, 
will  make  a  nice  gift  to  Jarl  Hakon !  Great 
boasts,  great  boasts !" 


Sigurd  flushed.  As  he  looked  at  the 
viking,  his  heart  gave  a  sudden  leap,  for, 
framed  in  the  cabin  doorway  behind,  he 
saw  the  face  of  Astrid,  her  finger  on  her 
lips.  Making  no  sign,  he  answered  the 
leader  calmly. 

"  In  that  case,  leave  us  alone  till  we  get 
to  Thrandheim."  As  he  said  this,  Sigurd 
lay  down  again,  turning  his  back  on  Thor- 
kel. The  latter  sneered,  and  stepped  to 
the  edge  of  the  forecastle,  above  the  ship's 
waist.  Sigurd  opened  his  eyes,  and  saw 
Astrid  making  signs,  and  holding  in  her 
hand  his  sword. 

Sigurd  comprehended  the  plan  instantly. 
He  silently  drew  his  feet  up  and  gathered 
his  muscles;  Thorkel  was  giving  orders,  a 
few  paces  away,  and  paid  no  heed  to  him. 
The  boy  slowly  rose  to  one  knee;  he  saw 
Astrid  run  toward  him,  and  at  the  same  in- 
stant he  threw  himself  headfirst  at  Thorkel, 
striking  him  fairly  in  the  waist. 

The  viking  fell  forward  with  a  cry,  and 
lay  motionless  on  the  deck  beneath.  Sigurd 
would  have  followed  him  over  the  low  rail, 
but  for  a  hand  that  gripped  his  bound  arms 
and  stayed  him;  then  he  felt  the  bonds  cut 
and  a  sword  pushed  into  his  hand. 

"Hold  the  ladder,"  panted  the  girl, 
while  I  arouse  Vagn." 

Sigurd  sprang  to  the  top  of  the  narrow 
ladder  that  led  up  from  the  deck  below  just 
as  the  surprised  men  seized  their  weapons. 
An  arrow  tore  through  his  hair;  another 
followed,  but  Sigurd  parried  it  with  his 
blade,  and  another  after  it.  This  was  an 
old  viking  exercise,  and  the  boy  felt  no 
fear;  but  with  a  cry  of  dismay  Astrid  ran 
to  the  cabin,  quickly  returning  with  a 
shield. 

"  Here,  this  will  help  you !"  Sigurd 
grasped  it  just  in  time  to  ward  off  a  spear, 
and  now  the  first  man  was  on  the  ladder. 
He  held  a  shield  above  his  head,  but 
Sigurd  swung  his  sword  and  brought  it 
down  with  all  his  might.  The  keen  weapon 
sheared  through  the  tough  bull's  hide,  and 


14 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


the  man  fell  back  among  his  comrades. 

Thord,  who  had  brought  the  water,  now 
made  a  dash,  coming  up  the  ladder  three 
steps  at  a  time,  and  wielding  an  axe.  As 
he  reached  the  tou  Sigurd  drove  his  sword, 
but  too  late;  the  axe  descended  on  his 
shield  and  bore  him  to  his  knees.  Again 
the  weapon  whirled  above  him,  and  Thord 
staggered  backward  with  a  hoarse  cry, 
clearing  the  ladder  in  his  fall. 

Springing  up,  Sigurd  saw  Astrid  behind 
him,  bow  in  hand,  and  Vagn,  pale  but  de- 
termined, stepped  to  his  side.  Those  be- 
low drew  back,  and  the  boys  saw  them  re- 
viving Thorkel,  who  was  stunned  by  his 
fall.  Sigurd  leaned  on  his  sword. 

"  Look  here,  Vagn,  we  can't  keep  this 
up  all  day;  one  or  two  good  showers  of 
arrows  will  finish  us." 

Vagn  pointed  to  the  cabin.  "  We  can 
hold  that  against  them  all,  and  Astrid  says 
that  food  and  water  are  inside." 

Sigurd  laughed.  "  You  look  like  a  Val- 
kyrie, Astrid !  I  owe  you  thanks  for  my 
life,  too — but  what  is  Thorkel  up  to?" 

"  Back — back  to  the  cabin !"  cried 
Astrid.  "  They  are  climbing  around  the 
bow  to  take  us  from  behind !" 

A  glance  showed  them  half  a  dozen  men 
climbing  through  the  bow  under  the  drag- 
on's head  up  to  the  forecastle.  It  was  use- 
less to  try  to  hold  the  whole  fore-deck,  so 
the  two  boys  and  Astrid  ran  to  the  cabin, 
shut  the  heavy  door,  and  bolted  it  securely. 
There  was  no  window,  and  only  one  or 
two  high  loop-holes  gave  fresh  air  to  those 
within. 

"What  chance  have  we  of  rescue?" 
asked  Astrid,  sitting  down  on  a  pile  of 
furs. 

"  Little  enough,"  replied  Vagn,  moodily, 
while  Sigurd  threw  himself  down  beside 
her.  "  No  one  knows  where  we  went,  and 
we  won't  be  missed  till  noon.  It  must  be 
about  three  hours  past  that  now." 

The  Norsemen,  realizing  the  futility  of 
trying  to  break  in,  made  no  sign;  and  the 


afternoon  slowly  wore  away.  The  ship 
was  bearing  north  under  full  sail,  and  all 
three  captives  realized  that  it  was  only  a 
matter  of  time  before  they  would  have  to 
give  up. 

Evidently  the  Norsemen  had  been  spy- 
ing on  the  Danes.  Vagn  had  been  struck 
down  by  a  glancing  blow,  and  all  three 
had  been  taken  to  the  ship,  which  left  the 
land  at  once.  Astrid  had  been  left  un- 
bound, and  had  taken  advantage  of  the  op- 
portunity as  soon  as  Sigurd  became  con- 
scious. 

Toward  evening  a  rap  sounded  on  the 
door,  and  the  voice  of  Thorkel  called  to 
them: 

"  Vagn  Akison  !    Can  you  hear  me  ?" 


CHAPTER  III. 
JARL  HAKON  OF  NORWAY. 

^^T^T/TELL    enough,"     replied     Vagn, 
Y^     "  what  is  it?" 

"  I  suppose  you  see  that  you 
cannot  hold  out  for  ever;  but  it  would  be 
needless  trouble  for  my  men  to  batter  in 
the  door.  To-morrow  we  will  meet  Jarl 
Hakon,  and  if  you  give  yourselves  up  in 
peace  I  will  not  bind  you." 

"  What  shall  we  do  ?"  whispered  Vagn. 
"  It  is  true  that  we  cannot  hold  out  here." 

"  Do !"  exclaimed  Astrid.  "  Would  you 
trust  your  father's  betrayer?  Wait  till  we 
meet  Hakon,  that  will  be  time  enough  to 
give  up !" 

Vagn  raised  his  voice.  "  We  wish 
nought  to  do  with  traitors,  Thorkel.  Let 
Jarl  Hakon  speak  with  us ;  till  then  we  will 
bide." 

Thorkel  made  no  answer,  and  they  heard 
him  move  away.  The  three  captives  ate 
some  of  the  food,  drank  a  little  stale  water, 
and  with  nightfall  the  boys  took  watch  and. 
watch,  leaving  the  single  couch  to  Astrid. 

Toward    morning,    however,    the    latter 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


15 


awoke  and  insisted  on  doing  her  share  of 
the  watching;  so  Sigurd,  dead  tired,  yielded 
up  his  watch  and  dropped  off  to  sleep.  The 
boys  were  now  suffering  from  their 
wounds,  but  they  had  refused  to  let  Astrid 
bind  them  up,  as  this  was  strictly  against 
the  laws  of  the  Jomsvikings. 

These  fierce  men  were  trained  with  the 
greatest  strictness,  indeed,  and  death  was 
the  penalty  for  the  slightest  infraction  of 
their  laws.  Wounds  might  not  be  bound 
up,  and  no  pain  might  be  complained  of; 
for  suffering  was  only  part  of  the  long 
training  that  made  the  Jomsborg  brother- 
hood the  most  terrible  fighters  in  the  world. 

Both  boys  were  wakened  by  a  jar  that 
shook  the  ship,  and  they  found  the  sun 
well  up.  "  What  was  that  shock  ?"  they 
cried,  in  alarm. 

"  Another  ship,"  replied  Astrid.  "  I  can 
see  nothing,  but  I  heard  the  sound  of  oars 
and  voices." 

Springing  to  the  loopholes,  they  found 
that  they  could  see  nothing;  but  the  sound 
of  excited  talking  came  to  them,  and  in  a 
few  moments  steps  advanced  quickly  to 
the  door. 

"  Ho,  Vagn  Akison  !  Astrid  of  Vend- 
land !  Open !" 

Astrid  seized  Vagn's  arm.  "  It  is  Jarl 
Hakon  !  I  know  his  voice  well !" 

Without  hesitation,  Sigurd,  sheathing 
his  sword,  threw  open  the  door.  There  in 
the  sunlight  stood  a  man  of  lofty  stature, 
magnificently  armed  and  with  beard  and 
hair  as  sunny  as  that  of  Sigurd ;  but  his 
face  was  gloomy,  and  his  eyes  quick  and 
shifty. 

"  Do  you  yield  to  me  ?"  he  asked  quietly. 

Astrid  laughed.  "  So  you  war  against 
girls,  Jarl?  Well,  I  suppose  I  must  sur- 
render !" 

The  Jarl  smiled,  and  laid  his  hand  on 
her  hair.  "  Keep  the  bow,  child ;  you  have 
done  nobly  and  well.  Come  to  my  own 
ship." 

As  they   followed  him  down  the  ladder 


and  over  the  side,  Sigurd  saw  that  Hakon's 
hair  was  streaked  with  gray,  and  that  he 
walked  stiffly  as  from  old  wounds.  Be- 
side Thorkel's  ship  lay  another,  a  splendid 
warship,  and  as  they  climbed  over  the  bul- 
warks the  two  ships  were  cast  apart. 
Hakon  led  the  way  to  his  cabin,  and  said, 
kindly : 

"  Sit  you  down  and  fear  not.  Thorkel 
has  told  me  the  tale  of  the  vows,  especially 
that  of  yours,  Vagn  Akison.  By  the  ham- 
mer of  Thor,  your  comrades  will  have 
tough  work  if  they  think  to  take  Norway 
from  me !"  He  smiled  grimly. 

"  Jarl,"  exclaimed  Astrid,  "  was  it  by 
your  orders  that  we  have  been  attacked? 
Remember  that  Svein  is  my  uncle !" 

Hakon  nodded.  "  I  am  sorry,  indeed, 
that  you  were  taken ;  you  will  be  returned 
unharmed  later,  with  whatever  scat  Svein 
thinks  just.  But  who  are  you,  Fairhair?" 

Sigurd  laughed.  "  That  is  truly  what 
men  call  me,  Jarl;  my  name  is  Sigurd 
Buisson." 

Hakon  whistled  in  surprise.  "  So !  Then 
I  have  two  good  hostages  !  All  the  better ; 
I  will  take  you  up  to  Thrandheim  with  me, 
but  have  no  fear,  for  you  will  be  well 
treated — at  least  for  the  present." 

With  this  Hakon  left  the  cabin,  giving  it 
up  to  them,  and  the  voyage  began.  The 
boys  were  indeed  treated  well,  their  weap- 
ons were  left  them,  and  had  it  not  been 
for  the  surrounding  circumstances  they 
would  have  enjoyed  themselves  immensely. 

That  night  they  made  the  southern  end 
of  Norway,  for  the  ship  was  pushed  on 
with  all  speed,  both  of  sail  and  oars.  Jarl 
Hakon  was  racing  for  his  kingdom  now, 
and  no  effort  was  spared  to  reach  Thrand- 
heim, Norway's  capital,  as  soon  as  might 
be. 

Next  morning  they  landed  at  Howes, 
and  Hakon  sent  speedy  messengers  north 
over  the  mountains  to  his  son  Jarl  Eirik, 
who  was  in  Raumarike ;  and  splitting  up 
war  arrows,  dispatched  them  to  all  the 


16 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


chiefs  near  by  as  a  token  to  gather  men  at 
once.  Then,  with  fresh  rowers,  the  ship 
hastened  on  as  never  ship  had  hastened  be- 
fore, for  the  realm  of  Norway  was  at  stake. 

The  following  evening  they  stopped 
at  Raumsdale  to  send  out  the  war-arrow 
and  get  new  rowers;  but  they  pushed  on 
quickly,  and  on  the  third  day  sped  up  the 
Thrandheim  Firth  and  reached  the  city  just 
after  sunset. 

An  immense  crowd  greeted  them,  for 
the  news  had  sped  fast,  and  they  landed  amid 
a  great  shouting  and  clash  of  arms.  Jarl 
Hakon  kept  the  boys  with  him,  and  sent 
Astrid  to  the  King's  Hall,  where  she 
would  be  given  waiting-women  and  cared 
for  as  became  her  rank.  Then,  without 
going  thither  himself,  he  turned  aside, 
followed  by  all  the  multitude,  and  pro- 
ceeded to  the  great  temple  of  Thor,  the 
War-god. 

Jarl  Hakon  was  a  pagan,  believing  firm- 
ly in  the  old  gods  of  Norway,  as  indeed 
most  of  his  subjects  did.  The  Thrandheim 
temple  was  the  greatest  in  the  land,  and 
Jarl  Hakon,  as  ruler  of  the  country,  was 
the  high-priest. 

As  they  passed  beneath  the  great  stone 
doorway  Sigurd  Fairhair  shivered,  and 
Vagn  whispered  to  him,  "  Firm,  Sigurd, 
hold  firm !" 

Sigurd  pressed  his  hand  in  reply.  As 
they  saw  whither  they  were  going,  the 
boys  had  resolved  not  to  take  part  in  the 
worship  of  the  heathen  gods,  for  both  were 
Christians.  The  temple  was  high  and 
gloomy,  and  the  torches  lit  it  very  poorly; 
but  around  the  sides  they  could  see  statues 
of  Odin  the  one-eyed,  Freya  the  beautiful, 
and  the  other  gods.  At  the  end,  opposite 
the  doorway,  stood  a  high  altar  before  the 
golden  statue  of  Thor,  and  Hakon  slowly 
ascended  the  steps. 

As  he  did  so,  the  vikings,  bonders,  and 
townfolk  fell  on  their  knees,  and  beyond 
the  altar  Sigurd  noticed  the  priests  bring- 
ing in  a  white  bull  for  sacrifice.  Looking 


around,  he  saw  that  he  and  Vagn  were  the 
only  ones  standing;  others  saw  it,  too,  and 
an  angry  mutter  ran  through  the  vast 
building,  like  the  low  gathering  of  a  storm. 

The  two  boys  paled,  but  stood  firm  and 
erect,  as  Jarl  Hakon  uttered  a  short  prayer 
to  the  war  god.  When  his  voice  ceased, 
the  mutter  behind  him  swelled  into  a  roar, 
with  fierce  shouts  of  "  Kneel !"  "  Kneel !" 
"  Death  to  the  Christians  !" 

Hakon  turned  and  raised  his  hand,  the 
roar  dying  away  at  once.  When  he  saw 
the  cause  of  the  tumult  his  face  darkened. 

"  To  your  knees,  to  your  knees  !  Would 
you  insult  Thor  in  his  own  temple?" 

"  We  kneel  to  none  save  the  white 
Christ,"  spoke  out  Sigurd  boldly,  though 
his  heart  beat  fast. 

Hakon's  hand  flew  to  his  sword,  and  the 
crowd  surged  forward ;  then  the  Jarl's  hand 
dropped,  and  he  motioned  to  one  of  his 
men. 

"  Harald,  take  these  two  to  the  King's 
Hall  and  see  that  no  harm  comes  to  them, 
on  your  life.  Go  !" 

Without  a  word  the  boys  followed  the 
man  as  he  led  the  way  out,  their  heads 
high  and  their  hands  on  their  swords. 
The  Norsemen  made  way  for  them  with 
muttered  threats,  but  gaining  the  open  air, 
their  guide  led  them  through  the  dark 
streets,  and  in  a  few  minutes  stopped  at 
the  Hall. 

They  were  led  to  a  room,  and  the  door 
was  bolted.  At  the  rasp  of  the  bolt  Vagn 
broke  silence. 

"  Whew !  That  was  a  close  shave  for 
us,  old  man !  I  was  scared  stiff  when  you 
answered  Hakon!" 

"  So  was  I,"  admitted  Sigurd,  smiling. 
"  But  we  are  too  valuable  as  hostages,  so 
it  didn't  take  much  bravery.  See  here, 
are  we  going  to  stay  with  Hakon?" 

"  Not  if  we  can  help  it,"  laughed  Vagn. 
"  I  suppose  we'll  be  watched  closely, 
though,  and  then  we  must  look  out  for 
Astrid." 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


17 


Sigurd  nodded.  "  Well,  we'll  see  her  in 
the  morning.  She  is  not  in  danger  for 
the  present,  anyway." 

Sigurd  was  mistaken,  however,  for  they 
did  not  see  Astrid  for  a  week.  They  were 
closely  confined  to  their  room,  and  only  on 
the  sixth  day  following  were  they  allowed 
to  leave  it.  Their  warder  was  the  same 
who  had  led  them  from  the  temple  the  first 
night.  As  he  came  in  on  the  sixth  morn- 
ing, he  left  the  door  open,  and  said : 

"  You  are  free  of  the  town,  but  do  not 
leave  it.  Jarl  Hakon  has  gone,  so  you  had 
best  be  watchful,  as  I  am  responsible  for 
you." 

"  Where  has  Hakon  gone  ?  Is  the  Lady 
Astrid  here?"  asked  Vagn. 

"  I  know  nothing  of  any  Lady  Astrid, 
but  Jarl  Hakon  has  gone  south  to  More 
to  raise  men,  and  will  return  to  meet  Jarl 
Eirik,  mayhap." 

The  two  boys  did  not  wait  to  learn  more, 
but  hastened  out  to  the  great  hall,  and 
there  they  found  a  woman  who  directed 
them  to  Astrid's  room.  Making  their  way 
thither,  Astrid  came  to  the  door  with  a 
cry  of  joy. 

"  Oh,  I  thought  you  were  dead !  I  saw 
Jarl  Hakon  once,  but  he  was  terribly  busy 
and  would  tell  me  nothing.  Where  have 
you  been  ?"  . 

Vagn  outlined  their  adventure  at  the 
temple,  and  told  of  their  subsequent  im- 
prisonment in  a  few  words. 

"  I  never  would  have  dared  do  that !" 
exclaimed  Astrid  as  he  finished.  "  To 
brave  all  those  men  that  way  !  But  come 
over  here  to  this  window  and  speak  low; 
there  are  women  in  the  next  room." 

Making  sure  that  the  door  was  fast, 
Sigurd  and  Vagn  joined  her  at  the  win- 
dow. 

"  Last  night  I  heard  two  men  talking  out 
in  the  hall,  and  I  listened.  Jarl  Eirik  has 
gathered  a  great  force  of  men  from  Raum- 
adale  and  Halogaland  and  Thrandheim,  and 
is  fitting  out  an  immense  fleet  in  the  great- 


est haste.  Hakon  is  raising  men  in  North 
and  South  More.  Two  nights  ago,  just 
before  Hakon  left,  a  messenger  came  from 
Eirik. 

"  Here  is  their  plan.  When  Hakon  has 
raised  all  the  men  he  can,  he  will  come 
north  to  meet  Eirik,  who  is  making  his 
way  south.  They  expect  to  have  at  least 
150  longships  when  they  combine  forces, 
and  intend  to  wait  for  your  fleet  in 
Hiorunga  Bay  and  take  them  in  a  trap." 

"A  trap!"  cried  Sigurd.  "With  that 
great  force?" 

"  Yes,  because  they  are  afraid  of  the 
men  of  Jomsborg,  even  with  the  numbers 
three  to  one.  The  peasants  are  to  tell  Jarl 
Sigvald  that  Hakon  is  in  Hiorunga  Bay 
with  only  one  or  two  ships,  and  Sigvald 
and  Bui  will  hurry  in  to  capture  him,  thus 
falling  among  the  whole  fleet.  "  Do  you 
see?" 

Sigurd's  eyes  flashed.  "  So  Hakon  is  a 
traitor  still !  This  is  terrible,  Vagn ;  in  a 
trap  like  that  no  one  will  escape !" 

"  I  am  afraid  not,  Fairhair,"  Vagn 
shook  his  head  sadly.  "  Sigvald  will  fall 
into  it,  for  he  is  impetuous  and  hasty,  as  is 
your  father  also.  I  see  only  one  thing  to 
do." 

"What  is  that?"  cried  the  others,  as  he 
paused. 

"  That  is  for  you,  Sigurd,  and  me  to 
steal  a  boat  here  in  the  harbor  and  sail 
out  south.  We  have  a  bare  chance  of 
reaching  Sigvald  in  time.  Has  Eirik 
reached  Thrandheim  yet?"  He  turned  to 
Astrid. 

"  Not  yet,  but  he  is  expected  at  any 
time." 

"  Then  we  may  make  it !"  broke  in 
Sigurd,  excitedly. 

Here  Astrid  drew  herself  up,  and  said, 
in  a  determined  voice,  "  Wait  a  minute !  If 
you  go  I  go,  too ;  you  needn't  think  you  can 
leave  me  behind!" 


18 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


CHAPTER  IV. 


THE  RESCUE  IN  THE  BAY. 


f  f'T'^HAT  you  sha'n't,"  replied  Vagn. 
"  We  may  be  blown  out  to  sea 
or  captured  by  Eirik  or  Hakon  ; 
there  is  no  telling.  You  are  safe  here." 

Astrid's  eyes  flashed,  and  she  cried, 
angrily,  "I  say  I  will  go!  If  we  are 
taken,  I  will  be  just  as  safe;  and  you  two 
can  handle  a  small  boat  in  any  sea." 

"  But,  Astrid,"  objected  Sigurd,  in  dis- 
may, "  at  best  it  will  take  us  three  days, 
and—" 

"  So  much  the  more  need  of  another  per- 
son. Now  say  no  more."  She  set  her 
mouth  determinedly,  and  Vagn's  opposi- 
tion vanished  in  a  peal  of  laughter. 

"Come  on,"  he  cried  gayly;  "I  would 
rather  fight  a  dozen  Norsemen  than  try  to 
oppose  you  !  We'll  go  down  to  the  harbor 
now  and  see  about  a  boat." 

"  You  seem  to  think  it  is  no  more  than  a 
matter  of  picking  out  a  boat  and  raising  the 
sail,"  laughed  Sigurd,  as  they  left  the  hall. 

"  No,"  returned  Vagn,  "  but  there's  no 
use  thinking  about  obstacles  before  they 
appear." 

The  streets  were  thronged  with  men 
from  the  countryside  roundabout,  and  the 
armorers  seemed  to  be  doing  a  thriving 
business.  No  one  paid  any  attention  to  the 
three,  and  they  soon  made  their  way  to  the 
waterside. 

As  they  walked  slowly  along,  looking  at 
the  ships  in  the  harbor,  Sigurd  suddenly 
stopped. 

"  Hurrah  !  I  believe  that  I  have  a  better 
plan  still  !"  he  cried.  "  Do  you  see  that 
ship  over  there  with  the  yellow  eyes 
painted  in  her  prow?" 

"  What  of  her?"  asked  Vagn. 

"  Don't  you  remember  ?  She  was  in 
Jomsborg  a  month  since,  and  her  captain  is 
an  old  friend  of  Jarl  Sigvald's.  Why  can't 
we  get  him  to  take  us  down  below 
Hiorunga  Bay  to  meet  the  fleet?" 


"The  very  thing!"  Astrid  clapped  her 
hands  in  delight.  "  I  confess  that  it  seemed 
well-nigh  hopeless  to  make  our  way  in  a 
small  boat  without  being  captured  or 
blown  far  out  to  sea.  But  suppose  he 
won't  take  us?" 

"  He  will,"  returned  Vagn,  "  I  remember 
his  name — Ulf  Ringsson,  and  he  will  be 
glad  to  help  Sigvald.  How  shall  we  see 
him?" 

"  Do  you  take  Astrid  back  to  the  hall, 
and  I  will  row  out  in  a  small  boat,"  replied 
Sigurd.  "  If  any  are  watching  us,  we  will 
throw  them  off  that  way." 

So  Astrid  and  Vagn  turned  back,  and 
Sigurd  sauntered  about  for  a  time,  as  if 
watching  the  shipping.  Presently  he  wan- 
dered down  to  a  boatman. 

"  Lend  me  your  boat  for  an  hour  or  two, 
my  friend,"  he  said,  handing  the  man  a 
coin. 

"  Willingly,"  responded  the  man,  push- 
ing out  his  craft  and  putting  the  oars  into 
it.  "  Business  is  not  so  good  these  days ; 
I  fear  that  I  may  have  to  go  with  Jarl 
Eirik  if  I  want  to  make  money !" 

"  Better  not,"  laughed  Sigurd,  "  you 
might  meet  Jomsborg  steel,  and  that  would 
be  bad  luck." 

The  man  chuckled  as  he  shoved  Sigurd 
off.  "  No  danger,  my  lord !  If  I'm  not 
here  when  you  return,  just  pull  the  boat 
up  and  leave  her." 

Sigurd  nodded,  and  pulled  slowly  from 
the  shore.  He  did  not  head  straight  out 
to  the  ship,  but  visited  other  craft  first, 
asking  questions  of  their  crews  and  appear- 
ing simply  curious.  After  a  little  he 
reached  the  side  of  Ulf's  ship,  and  slipping 
under  the  side  opposite  the  shore,  clam- 
bered over  the  rail. 

As  he  set  foot  on  the  deck,  a  tall  man 
rose  and  faced  him.  "  Who  are  you  and 
what  do  you  want?" 

Sigurd  smiled  and  took  off  his  fur  cap. 
"  I  want  Ulf  Ringsson,  and  I  am  Sigurd 
Buisson  of  Bornholm." 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


19 


Ulf  grasped  his  hand  with  a  cry  of  sur- 
prise, and  led  him  to  the  cabin. 

"  The  crew  is  ashore,  but  it  is  best  to 
take  no  chances.  Now  what  are  you  doing 
here?  I  heard  you  had  been  taken  by 
Hakon." 

The  boy  swiftly  outlined  his  adventures, 
told  of  the  trap  that  was  to  be  laid  for 
the  Jomsborg  fleet,  and  asked  Ulf  to  help 
them. 

"  Of  course,  Sigurd,  of  course !  I  can 
stow  you  two  and  the  Lady  Astrid  away 
comfortably,  but  if  we  are  overhauled — 
well,  my  men  are  no  fighters,  you  know !" 

"  We'll  take  our  chance  of  that,"  replied 
Sigurd,  thanking  him  warmly  for  his  aid. 
"  Now,  when  can  you  sail  ?  Every  minute 
counts." 

"  I  know,  but  I  can't  possibly  start  sooner 
than  the  morning  of  the  third  day  from 
now.  Say  midnight  of  the  second  night 
after  this.  My  cargo  is  not  all  in,  and  it 
would  look  too  suspicious  altogether.  But 
the  '  Otter  '  is  a  fast  ship,  and  we  will  get 
down  the  coast  much  faster  than  will  Eirik 
with  his  warships." 

"  You  can  expect  us  then,"  said  Sigurd. 
"  Will  you  meet  us  on  shore  ?" 

"  It  will  be  better  so,"  replied  Ulf.  "  I 
will  get  the  '  Otter '  farther  out  before 
nightfall,  and  will  wait  for  you  opposite 
here  with  a  small  boat." 

With  a  parting  handshake  Sigurd  slipped 
over  the  side  again,  and  rowed  slowly 
through  the  shipping  on  his  way  back.  As 
he  passed  a  large  ship,  he  saw  that  the 
sailors  were  making  a  clumsy  effort  to 
raise  the  sail.  Indeed,  from  their  looks  he 
took  them  for  newly  raised  levies  from  the 
country  on  their  way  to  join  Hakon,  as 
the  ship  was  a  war  vessel.  He  rested  a 
moment,  watching  them  with  a  smile;  then 
it  died  away  as  he  saw  an  officer,  whose 
back  was  turned  toward  him,  standing 
directly  beneath  the  heavy  spar  that  the 
men  were  hoisting. 

"  He'd  better  look  out,"  thought  Sigurd, 


"if  those  fellows  lost  their  grip  on  the  rope 
— ah,  I  thought  so!" 

For,  even  as  the  thought  flashed  through 
his  mind,  the  rope  had  slipped  loose  from 
the  men,  and  the  yard  fell,  striking  the 
officer  a  glancing  blow  and  knocking  him 
overboard. 

With  a  shout  Sigurd  drove  his  oars  into 
the  water  and  reached  the  place  where  the 
man  had  gone  down  before  the  confused 
men  on  the  ship  could  put  out  a  boat.  He 
could  see  nothing  of  the  man,  so,  quickly 
throwing  off  his  fur  cap  and  cloak  and  un- 
buckling his  sword-belt,  Sigurd  took  a  long 
breath  and  dived  from  the  boat's  side. 

For  an  instant  the  ice-cold  water  para- 
lyzed him ;  then,  opening  his  eyes,  the  boy 
struck  down.  There,  just  beneath  him,  was 
the  senseless  face  of — Thorkel  Leira ! 

Sigurd  checked  his  stroke.  Why  not 
leave  this  traitor  and  villain  to  his  fate,  so 
richly  deserved?  Why  risk  his  own  life 
for  that  of  a  worthless  fellow  such  as  Thor- 
kel? But  he  only  hesitated  an  instant; 
hastily  gripping  the  man's  hair,  he  made 
for  the  surface. 

Although  Sigurd  was  a  good  swimmer, 
he  reached  the  air  with  a  great  sigh  of  re- 
lief, for  he  had  been  under  water  nearly  a 
minute,  and  the  water  was  too  cold  for 
comfort.  Thorkel  had  been  struck  sense- 
less and  made  no  resistance. 

As  he  emerged,  a  shout  sounded  in  his 
ear,  and  there  beside  him  was  a  small 
boat.  His  own  skiff  was  not  far,  and  after 
the  men  at  his  side  hauled  up  Thorkel,  he 
struck  out  for  his  own  boat.  Sigurd  re- 
alized only  too  well  that  he  did  not  want 
to  be  questioned,  for  any  mishap  now  would 
ruin  their  plans  of  escape;  so,  paying  no 
heed  to  the  shouts  of  the  Norsemen,  he 
clambered  over'  the  stern  of  his  craft, 
donned  his  fur  coat  hastily,  and  made  for 
the  shore. 

He  pulled  up  the  boat  and  made  off  at 
once.  His  dripping  clothes  had  already 
frozen,  and  the  cloak  hid  most  of  them, 


20 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


so  that  he  regained  the  hall  without  ques- 
tion. As  he  entered  his  room,  Vagn 
greeted  him  with  a  cry  of  amazement  when 
he  threw  off  the  cloak. 

"  What  on  earth — "  he  began,  but  Sigurd 
interrupted  with  a  laugh. 

"  Water,  rather,  Vagn.  Help  me  get 
these  wet  things  off  first." 

Jarl  Hakon  had  sent  them  a  goodly  sup- 
ply of  garments,  and  when  Sigurd  had 
changed  to  dry  clothes  he  recounted  the 
adventure  to  his  cousin. 

"  Good  for  you,  old  man !"  cried  Vagn, 
as  he  finished.  "  I  don't  think  that  I  would 
have  resisted  the  temptation  to  let  him 
drown  and  get  rid  of  the  wretch.  Did  any 
recognize  you?" 

Sigurd  shook  his  head.  "  I  got  away 
too  quickly,  and  Thorkel  was  senseless. 
The  yard  struck  him  on  the  shoulder,  so  I 
suppose  he  wasn't  very  badly  hurt.  Don't 
say  anything  to  Astrid  about  it." 

"Why  not?"  asked  Vagn,  in  surprise. 

"  Well,"  Sigurd  hesitated,  "  she  would 
make  a  fuss  about  it,  and — well,  I  really 
wish  you  wouldn't,  old  fellow !" 

Seeing  that  Sigurd  really  wished  it  so, 
Vagn  agreed,  and  they  went  to  Astrid's 
room  to  tell  her  of  their  plans  with  Ulf. 

Astrid  greeted  them  with  a  laugh.  "  You 
changed  pretty  quickly,  Sigurd,"  she  said. 

"  Why,  what  do  you  mean  ?"  Both 
boys  stared  at  her. 

"  Oh,  one  of  my  maids  just  ran  in  and 
told  me  how  some  yellow-haired  stranger 
rescued  our  old  friend  Thorkel  down  in 
the  harbor,  and  ran  off  before  they  could 
find  out  who  he  was.  So  I  knew  that  it 
must  be  Fairhair,  here !" 

"  So  it  was,  Astrid !"  cried  out  Vagn. 
"  If  I'd  been  there  I  would  have  let  the 
scoundrel  drown !" 

"  No  you  wouldn't,  Vagn,"  protested 
Sigurd.  "  You  might  kill  him  in  fair 
fight,  but  you  wouldn't  let  him  drown  with- 
out trying  to  save  him !" 

"  Never  mind,"  declared  Astrid,  looking 


at  Sigurd,  "  it  was  a  noble  thing  to  do, 
Fairhair,  and  I  am  proud  of  you  for  it." 

Sigurd  blushed  rosily,  and  hastily 
turned  the  conversation  by  describing  his 
meeting  with  Ulf. 

"  By  the  way,"  added  Vagn,  "  I  found 
out  something.  At  night  our  doors  are 
locked  and  a  man  sleeps  outside  in  the 
hall,  before  them.  Hakon  must  think  we 
are  worth  keeping !" 

Sigurd  thought  it  over.  "  The  only  way 
I  can  see  is  to  entice  our  guard  inside  and 
tie  him  up,  then  go  to  Astrid's  room  and 
seize  her  guard  before  he  can  cry  out. 
Any  way,  Astrid,  be  ready  on  the  second 
night  from  this,  about  midnight,  and  we 
will  get  you  somehow." 

"  We  had  best  not  be  seen  together  in 
the  meantime,"  cautioned  the  girl,  "  or 
someone  may  become  suspicious." 

Vagn  nodded.  "  That's  right.  Well,  we 
won't  see  you  till  we  come  for  you,  then  !" 

"  All  right,"  laughed  Astrid,  as  they  left. 
"  Good-by,  till  then  !" 


CHAPTER  V. 
THE  ESCAPE  FROM  THRANDHEIM. 

THAT  night  the  two  boys  watched,  and 
discovered     that     their     guard    was 
changed  at  midnight,  so  they  decided 
to  make  the  attempt  as  soon  as  the  guards 
were    changed,    as    this   would   give    them 
more  time  to  get  away  safely. 

The  two  succeeding  days  passed  slowly, 
and  the  boys  spent  them  in  wandering 
about  the  town.  They  excited  no  attention, 
as  in  the  harbor  were  one  or  two  Danish 
ships,  a  vessel  from  England,  and  another 
from  Iceland,  both  of  the  latter  being  trad- 
ing ships  wintering  in  Norway.  Sigurd 
could  not  repress  a  shudder  as  once  they 
passed  the  gloomy  temple  of  Thor. 

"  When  will  these  people  ever  become 
Christian?"  he  said  to  his  cousin,  as  they 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


21 


gazed  at  the  massive  stone  portal.  Should 
we  really  conquer  Norway,  let  our  first 
deed  be  to  tear  down  this  blood-stained  old 
place,  and  erect  in  its  stead  a  temple  to 
Christ!" 

"  Aye,"  corrected  Vagn.  " '  If !'  A  vow 
is  an  easy  thing,  Fairhair,  to  make,  but 
a  hard  one  to  fulfill.  Norway  has  many 
chiefs  as  noble  as  Jarl  Hakon,  and  no 
country  can  be  conquered  against  its  will 
while  there  is  one  to  lead  the  people  against 
the  invader.  King  Svein,  or  his  son 
Canute,  may  well  take  England,  for  Ethel- 
red  is  a  cruel  and  hated  king;  but  I  mis- 
doubt that  we  shall  ever  come  to  Thrand- 
heim  as  conquerors." 

On  the  second  evening,  when  Harald 
came  to  lock  them  in  their  room,  he 
grumbled,  "  If  it  were  not  for  you  two,  I 
would  be  with  the  Jarls  now.  It  will  soon 
be  all  up  with  your  Jomsborgers  now !" 

"  Why,  what  do  you  mean  ?"  cried  Vagn. 
"  Eirik  hasn't  come  here  yet !" 

"  Nor  will  he,"  rejoined  Harald,  as  he 
shot  the  bolt.  "  He  passed  outside  the 
Firth  to-day  with  sixty  ships,  and  will  join 
his  father  by  to-morrow  night  at  More." 

"  How  many  ships  will  both  Jarls  have?" 
called  out  Sigurd. 

The  man  paused  in  the  hallway.  "  Close 
onto  two  hundred,  for  Hakon  took  seventy- 
four  south  with  him,  and  he  will  collect 
as  many  more  in  the  south." 

As  the  man's  steps  died  away  the  two 
boys  stared  at  each  other  in  dismal  silence. 

"  Too  late,  Sigurd !"  Vagn's  voice 
broke. 

"  Not  yet,"  contended  Sigurd,  stoutly. 
"  Ulf  said  that  the  '  Otter '  was  fast  enough 
to  pass  Eirik,  and  besides,  our  own  fleet 
may  not  have  come  so  far  north  yet. 
Never  give  up !" 

"  That's  true,"  granted  Vagn,  "  for  the 
men  will  probably  want  to  land  and  plun- 
der. Well,  there  may  be  hope  yet." 

They  stood  watch  and  watch  until  mid- 
night; then,  after  the  relieved  guard  had 


retired,  Vagn  nudged  Sigurd  and  the  lat- 
ter emitted  a  long,  dismal  groan. 

At  the  second  groan  the  man  outside 
stirred;  at  the  third  he  undid  the  bolts, 
and  said,  "  Here,  what's  wrong  ?  Are  you 
sick?" 

Sigurd  groaned  again,  muttering  some- 
thing, and  the  man  entered.  As  he  did  so, 
Vagn  threw  his  cloak  over  his  head  while 
Sigurd  sprang  at  him.  For  an  instant  he 
struggled  furiously,  but  the  cloak  stifled 
him,  and  soon  he  was  lying  bound  on  the 
floor,  while  the  boys  darted  off  down  the 
hall. 

Silently  they  made  their  way  down  to  the 
women's  quarters,  meeting  no  one.  The 
man  before  Astrid's  door  was  half  asleep, 
and  they  secured  him  with  only  a  slight 
struggle.  As  they  did  so,  the  door  opened 
and  the  girl  came  out,  a  dark  cloak  over 
her  kirtle. 

"  Good !"  she  whispered,  as  she  saw  the 
man  lying  bound.  "  I'm  all  ready." 

They  gained  the  street  without  mishap, 
and  ran  at  top  speed  down  the  hill  to  the 
harbor,  without  meeting  a  person.  Arriv- 
ing at  the  waterside,  they  found  the 
"  Otter's "  boat  awaiting  them,  with  Ulf 
himself  on  the  shore,  wrapped  in  a  cloak. 

As  they  rowed  out  to  the  ship,  Vagn 
told  Ulf  how  they  had  escaped,  and  as  they 
reached  the  "  Otter,"  Ulf  leaped  on  deck, 
crying  in  a  low  tone,  "  All  ready  men ! 
Slip  the  cable  and  out  oars." 

The  oars,  already  muffled,  were  run  out, 
and  the  men  soon  made  the  "  Otter  "  move 
briskly  through  the  water,  the  faint  star- 
light serving  to  guide  them  through  the 
shipping.  A  little  later  they  gained  the 
open  Firth,  and  the  huge  square  sail  was 
hoisted.  They  were  at  last  on  their  way 
home! 

"Well,  that  is  the  last  I  will  see  of 
Thrandheim  for  many  a  day,"  declared 
Ulf,  as  they  watched  the  shores  flit  by. 
"  It  will  not  matter  much,  though.  There 
is  little  to  be  gained  in  trading  from  this 


22 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


country,  and  next  voyage  I  think  I  will  go 
to  England  or  Flanders.  Now,  don't  you 
want  to  turn  in?  I  have  made  the  cabin 
ready  for  the  Lady  Astrid,  and  I  suppose 
that  you  can  turn  in  with  the  men,  as 
1  will." 

By  morning  they  were  well  down  the 
coast,  and  as  the  Otter  was  a  notably  fast 
ship,  Ulf  had  no  fear  of  pursuit.  All  day 
they  sailed  south,  and  at  evening  the  ship's 
prow  was  turned  out  to  sea. 

"  Eirik's  fleet  passed  down  yesterday 
afternoon,"  explained  Ulf,  "  and  we  do 
not  want  to  run  into  them.  If  the  wind 
holds  fair  we  will  be  nearly  opposite 
Hiorunga  Firth  by  morning,  and  will  turn 
in  to  the  coast  then." 

When  the  boys  wakened  in  the  morning 
they  saw  that  the  "  Otter "  was  indeed 
heading  east,  but  a  thick  fog  lay  over  the 
sea  and  the  wind  had  dropped,  the  "  Otter  " 
being  propelled  by  her  oars. 

"  We  are  near  the  coast,"  declared  Ulf, 
"  and  as  the  sun  must  be  just  rising  this 
fog  will  blow  away  before  long." 

Suddenly,  as  they  forged  slowly  ahead, 
the  helmsman  hailed  Ulf,  who  sprang  into 
the  forecastle. 

"  Come  hither,  friends,"  he  called  to  the 
boys,  and  pointing  ahead,  "  what  is  that 
yonder  ?" 

There,  ahead  of  them,  it  seemed  as 
though  many  lights  were  burning  dimly 
through  the  mist.  For  a  few  minutes  they 
gazed,  puzzled;  then  Vagn  gave  a  cry. 

"  Turn  her  prow,  quickly  !"  he  shouted  to 
the  helmsman.  "  Those  are  not  fires  at  all ! 
That  is  a  fleet  yonder,  and  the  fog  where 
they  are  must  have  cleared  off,  so  that 
the  sun  shines  on  the  gilded  dragon-prows ! 
That  is  what  we  see !" 

It  was  too  late,  however,  for  a  few  min- 
utes later  the  fog  cleared  off  around  them, 
and  not  a  mile  away  they  saw  the  high 
cliffs  of  Norway;  while,  farther  off, 
gleamed  the  white  sails  of  a  great  fleet  of 
ships. 


"Which  fleet  is  it?"  cried  Sigurd,  his 
heart  leaping. 

"  I  know  not,"  responded  Ulf.  "  We 
must  run  in  and  take  our  chance.  If  the 
worst  comes  to  the  worst,  we  can  outrun 
them,  for  the  wind  is  coming  up  strongly. 
Now  for  breakfast." 

They  ate  a  hurried  meal,  while  the 
"  Otter "  plowed  on  swiftly  through  the 
waves.  At  the  end  of  an  hour  Vagn,  who 
was  watching  from  the  forecastle,  cried  out 
in  joy.  "  It  is  our  own  fleet !  I  see  a  sail 
with  a  red  cross !" 

"  That  is  Hiorunga  Firth,  there  to  the 
north,"  declared  Ulf,  as  Astrid  joined  them 
in  the  prow.  "  See,  the  fleet  is  heading 
in  toward  it,  and  we  may  be  in  time  yet, 
for  we  will  be  up  with  them  in  half  an  hour." 

In  less  than  that  space  of  time,  indeed, 
they  had  come  so  near  that  they  could 
make  out  the  individual  ships,  and  as  they 
all  knew  Jarl  Sigvald's  ship  by  sight,  Ulf 
steered  toward  that  division. 

What  a  sight  it  was  !  Ship  after  ship, 
with  their  gayly  painted  sails  and  glittering 
prows,  in  the  shape  of  birds  and  beasts,  all 
crowded  with  armed  men,  while,  far  ahead, 
shone  the  sails  of  more. 

"  That  looks  strange,  Vagn,"  said  Sigurd, 
uneasily.  "  I  do  not  see  any  of  my  father's 
ships ;  it  must  be  that  he  has  pressed  ahead, 
and  may  fall  into  Sigvald's  trap !" 

A  few  minutes  later  the  nearest  ship 
hailed  them,  and  as  the  Jomsvikings  recog- 
nized Vagn  and  Sigurd  a  mighty  shout 
went  up,  which  rolled  from  ship  to  ship  as 
the  news  spread  through  the  fleet,  and  amid 
a  roar  of  war-horns  and  clashing  of  arms, 
the  "  Otter  "  drew  up  to  the  ship  of  Jarl 
Sigvald,  the  oars  being  hastily  drawn  in, 
and  Vagn  leaped  aboard,  followed  closely 
by  Sigurd. 

Sigvald  was  overjoyed  at  their  escape, 
but  there  was  no  time  for  telling  the  story 
now.  Vagn  swiftly  described  the  plot  of 
Jarl  Hakon,  and  a  yell  of  rage  arose  from 
the  men  who  had  crowded  around.  It  was 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


23 


As  they  all  knew  Jarl  8tf,val<1's  ship  Dy  sight,  Ulf  steered  toward  that  division. 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


25 


echoed  from  the  other  ships,  who  had 
drawn  in,  as  the  helmsman  shouted  out  the 
tidings. 

"  We  have  no  time  to  lose,  then,"  cried 
Sigvald,  "  for  Bui  has  gone  ahead  and  has 
landed  men  to  plunder."  He  turned  to  the 
"  Otter."  "  Ulf,"  he  shouted,  "  keep  the 
Lady  Astrid  on  board,  and  wait  for  three 
days  at  the  midmost  of  the  Herey  Isles,  a 
mile  or  two  south.  If  you  hear  no  news  of 
us  by  then,  fly  with  all  speed  to  King 
Svein." 

Ulf  waved  his  hand,  and  with  a  last 
good-by  the  boys  parted  from  Astrid  as  the 
ships  were  cast  asunder. 

"  I  will  put  you  on  board  your  ship," 
exclaimed  Sigvald  to  Vagn,  "  as  we  go. 
Up  sail !  Out  oars  !"  He  seized  his  great 
war-horn  and  blew  a  mighty  blast.  The 
men  sprang  to  their  places,  and  as  they 
passed  through  the  fleet  cheer  after  cheer 
went  up  for  the  plucky  boys  who  had 
brought  the  news.  Hastily  sails  arose 
again  and  blades  flashed  out  in  the  morn- 
ing sun,  for  Bui,  who  had  landed  ahead  of 
the  fleet  near  Hod  Island,  must  be  warned 
at  once. 

They  drew  alongside  Vagn's  ship,  and 
the  two  boys  sprang  on  board.  Vagn's 
men,  who  had  followed  his  father  and 
grandfather  in  many  a  hard  fray,  went  wild 
at  the  sight  of  him,  and  greeted  Sigurd  no 
less  heartily.  But  Fairhair  was  worried 
about  his  father,  who  he  knew  was  over- 
rash,  and  suddenly  he  heard  the  helmsman 
give  a  great  cry  of  dismay,  and  saw  him 
wave  his  arms. 

"What  is  it?"  he  cried,  as  he  dashed  up 
the  ladder,  followed  by  Vagn.  But  there 
was  no  need  of  words.  There,  cutting 
swiftly  around  the  end  of  Hod  Island  to- 
ward Hiorunga  Bay,  was  the  division  of 
Bui,  in  mad  haste.  He  had  fallen  into  the 
trap ! 


CHAPTER  VI. 

HIORUNGA   BAY. 

<  *  T7  ORWARD  !"  Jarl   Sigvald's  war- 

r*      horn  rang  out  its  command,  and 

the   fleet   pressed   on   to   support 

their  rash  chief.     Sigurd  gave  a  groan  of 

dismay,  but  Vagn  encouraged  him. 

"  He  won't  be  taken,  Fairhair,  but  will 
return  when  he  sees  the  trap.  Neverthe- 
less, we  have  fallen  into  it,  for  Sigvald  can- 
not back  out  now  with  honor ;  we  must  go 
forward  and  fight  like  Jomsborg  men  !" 

Bui's  ships  disappeared  around  the 
north  end  of  Hod  Island ;  then,  as  Sigvald 
got  his  fleet  into  battle  array,  with  each 
half-dozen  ships  lashed  side  by  side,  they 
came  back  into  sight,  with  lowered  sails 
and  oars  lashing  the  waters  to  spray. 

The  ship  of  Bui  was  the  first  to  reach 
the  fleet,  and  as  he  stood  in  the  forecastle 
and  shouted  of  his  discovery,  Sigvald 
checked  him,  and  ordered  him  to  form  his 
battle-line  behind  the  fleet.  Bui  rowed  past 
Vagn's  ship,  and  as  he  did  so  Sigurd  sprang 
on  the  rail,  with  a  shout. 

There  was  no  time  for  stopping,  so  his 
father  only  waved  his' hand  in  passing,  and 
called  out,  in  joy  and  surprise,  "  Skoal, 
Sigurd !  Use  your  best  weapons  to-day  !" 
It  was  the  last  word  Sigurd  ever  had  with 
his  father,  Bui  of  Bornholm. 

As  the  fleet  moved  forward  slowly,  one 
by  one  the  ships  of  Bui  straggled  back  and 
formed  behind  Sigvald's  line.  The  Joms- 
borg men  might  have  fled  still,  but  they 
scorned  to  do  that,  and  it  was  against  their 
laws.  The  day  was  clouding  up  now,  and 
as  they  turned  the  headland  into  the  bay, 
the  wind  suddenly  changed  and  blew  dead 
against  them — and  there,  moving  on  them, 
lay  the  Norse  fleet ! 

Spreading  out  like  a  great  crescent,  glit- 
tering with  oars  and  steel,  Hakon's  fleet 
moved  forward,  while  Sigvald  broke  his 
array  into  three  parts.  Vagn  Akison,  by 
virtue  of  his  father's  place  and  his  own  re- 


26 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


nown,  commanded  a  third  part  of  the 
ships;  beside  his  vessels  lay  those  of  Bui, 
while  Sigvald  commanded  the  last  twenty. 

"  Look,  Vagn !"  cried  Sigurd,  as  they 
watched  the  Norsemen,  still  a  half-mile  dis- 
tant, "  they  are  breaking  up  likewise  !" 

"  Yes,"  replied  Vagn  bitterly,  "  but  there 
must  be  nearly  two  hundred  ships  there, 
crowded  with  men.  That  means  sixty  or 
seventy  against  each  of  our  divisions  of 
twenty !" 

Then,  leaping  into  the  waist,  Vagn  dis- 
tributed the  byrnies,  or  shirts  of  woven 
steel  rings,  and  opened  several  chests  of 
swords  and  axes,  so  that  the  men  could  get 
at  them.  He  and  Sigurd  were  fully  armed, 
and  naught  remained  but  to  await  the  at- 
tack. 

It  was  not  long  in  coming.  Jarl  Hakon's 
banners  were  suddenly  raised,  with  a  great 
burst  of  war-horns,  and  a  flight  of  stones 
and  arrows  fell  among  the  Jomsborg  ships. 
Sigvald's  banner  was  run  up  likewise,  and 
his  men  replied,  but  the  Norsemen  had  the 
advantage,  for  the  wind  was  with  them,  and 
fast  rising  to  a  gale.  Nevertheless,  the 
Jomsvikings  shot  well,  and  occasioned  great 
confusion  among  their  foes,  for  their  long, 
sharp  shafts  pierced  shield,  byrnie  and  body. 

As  the  two  fleets  drew  together,  most  of 
the  bows  were  flung  aside,  and  the  spear- 
racks  were  emptied.  Sigurd  and  Vagn, 
standing  on  the  high  forecastle  with  their 
chosen  men,  plied  their  weapons  fast;  but 
a  minute  later,  with  a  crash  that  nearly 
threw  them  to  the  deck,  the  fleets  came  to- 
gether. 

"  Concentrate  on  the  ship  against  us !" 
shouted  Sigurd,  and  a  hail  of  spears  poured 
into  the  large  ship  whose  prow  ground  into 
that  of  Vagn's.  The  Norsemen  strove  to 
board,  but  a  terrible  burst  of  weapons  met 
them,  and  an  instant  later  Sigurd  gave  a 
cry  of  joy. 

"  Hurrah  !  We  will  win  yet !"  Vagn 
echoed  the  cry,  for  their  attacker  was  slow- 
ly withdrawing. 


"  Cast  a  grapnel  on  them !"  ordered 
Vagn,  and  as  the  Norse  ship  was  secured 
he  leaped  into  her,  followed  by  Sigurd  and 
his  forecastle  men.  The  Norsemen  gave 
way,  but  as  the  Jomsvikings  pressed  for- 
ward a  new  burst  of  horns  arose,  and  into 
the  press  sailed  a  dozen  fresh  ships. 

"  Back  for  your  lives !"  called  Sigurd,  as 
he  saw  a  crowd  of  the  enemy  pouring 
aboard.  "  Back  to  our  ship  !" 

They  could  see  nothing  of  the  battle  on 
either  hand,  for  they  were  surrounded  by 
the  Norse  ships;  but  as  they  gained  the 
deck  of  their  own  vessel  they  heard  a  wild 
shout  from  Bui's  ships,  and  again  the  Norse 
line  shrank  backward.  As  Sigurd  looked 
around,  he  saw  Jarl  Hakon's  ship  just  be- 
hind their  own. 

"  Look  there,  Vagn !  Order  the  men  to 
turn  their  spears  on  Hakon !" 

Vagn  did  so,  and  a  storm  of  spears  and 
arrows  poured  upon  the  Jarl's  ship.  He 
stood  proudly  in  the  forecastle,  and  for  a 
moment  the  rain  of  weapons  almost  hid 
him;  then  he  reappeared,  smiling,  but  his 
armor  was  ripped  to  pieces,  and  he  shook 
himself  free  of  it. 

Now  a  fresh  burst  of  foemen  bore  down 
on  Vagn's  division,  and  only  the  higher 
sides  of  the  vikings'  ships  saved  them. 
Men  were  falling  fast,  but  as  yet  the  vik- 
ings had  not  suffered  nearly  so  much  as 
had  the  enemy.  The  fighting  had  not  yet 
become  hand  to  hand,  and  in  the  thickly 
crowded  Norse  ships  not  a  Jomsborg  spear 
failed  of  its  mark,  and  the  trained  skill  of 
the  vikings  told  heavily  against  the  un- 
skilled levies  of  Hakon. 

Suddenly  Sigurd  laughed,  and  staggered. 
"What  means  the  laugh,  Fairhair?"  called 
Vagn,  who  was  directing  his  men  in  the 
waist. 

"  An  arrow,  but  in  the  arm  only,"  replied 
Sigurd.  A  shaft  had  pierced  his  arm,  just 
above  the  elbow,  but  he  snapped  off  the 
barb  and  drew  it  through  the  wound,  and 
continued  fighting.  The  next  moment, 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


27 


however,  another  arrow  flew  past  his  head 
and  was  buried  in  the  rail  behind  him;  a 
third  followed  it,  glancing  from  his  helmet. 

Sigurd  realized  that  someone  was  aiming 
at  him  steadily,  and  marking  the  direction 
from  which  the  arrows  came,  he  saw  the 
face  of  Thorkel  Leira  in  one  of  the  ships 
below.  The  man  was  just  aiming  a  fourth 
shaft,  half  covered  by  the  shield  of  a  fol- 
lower. 

Catching  the  arrow  on  his  shield,  Sigurd 
flung  a  spear  in  reply,  with  all  his  force. 
The  weapon  struck  full  on  the  shield  that 
covered  Thorkel,  pierced  it,  and  Thorkel 
staggered  back.  A  fresh  attack  drew 
Sigurd's  attention,  however,  and  when  he 
looked  for  Thorkel  again,  his  ship  had 
withdrawn.  Now  there  happened  a  strange 
and  terrible  thing. 

The  day  had  steadily  grown  darker,  with 
a  rising  wind.  Suddenly  a  blaze  of  light- 
ning fell  athwart  the  sky,  and  Jarl  Hakon's 
ship  stood  forth  in  the  sight  of  all,  wrapped 
in  lambent  flame,  the  Jarl  himself  standing 
triumphantly  in  the  stern,  grasping  a  ham- 
mer like  that  of  Thor. 

A  cry  of  horror  arose  from  the  Joms- 
vikings,  who  took  the  figure  for  that  of  the 
war  god;  and  the  lightning  was  followed 
by  a  thick  hail,  the  stones  as  large  as  eggs, 
which  burst  full  in  the  faces  of  the  Joms- 
borg  men. 

"  Thor  with  us  !  The  gods  fight  for  us  !" 
An  exultant  shout  pealed  upward  from  the 
Norse  host,  who  pressed  onward  with  re- 
newed vigor.  All  at  once  a  cry  broke  from 
Vagn,  a  cry  of  anger  and  dismay. 

"  Sigurd  !    Look  yonder  !" 

There  behind  them  Jarl  Sigvald  had  cut 
the  lashings  of  his  ships  and  was  fleeing ! 
The  Jomsborg  men  seemed  wild  with  terror, 
for  now  they  thought  that  Hakon  was 
right,  that  Thor  and  Odin  were  in  truth 
fighting  for  him,  and  they  lost  heart. 

Sigvald's  ship  cut  through  the  press  close 
behind  that  of  Vagn,  and  as  it  passed  the 
boy  called  out: 


"  Sigvald !  Turn  and  fight !  Turn  and 
fight !" 

But  Sigvald  only  urged  his  men  to  great- 
er efforts,  and  the  sail  was  run  up.  At  this 
Vagn  seized  a  spear  from  the  deck,  and 
with  a  curse  hurled  it  at  the  fleeing  Jarl. 
The  spear  missed  him,  but  struck  down  the 
helmsman  at  his  side,  and  the  ship  was  gone 
from  sight  in  a  moment. 

Louder  and  louder  pealed  the  war-horns 
of  Hakon,  as  ship  after  ship  followed  Sig- 
vald in  his  flight.  Vagn's  men  gave  one 
angry  yell,  then  fought  on  in  silence.  Pres- 
ently their  attackers  drew  back  for  breath- 
ing-space, and  as  they  did  so  the  boys  saw 
Bui's  ships  close  at  hand. 

Bui  was  without  hope,  but  he  was  true 
to  his  vows,  and  fought  on  stoutly.  The 
Norse  ships  gave  way  before  his  onset,  and 
with  a  shout  of  triumph  Bui's  men  cut  their 
lashings  to  pursue.  It  was  a  fatal  error; 
for  even  as  they  did  so  fresh  Norse  ships 
drove  down  on  them,  broke  their  solid  front, 
surrounded'  them  and  began  to  pour  in 
boarders. 

Sigurd,  watching  helplessly,  saw  the 
Norsemen  sweep  aboard  and  slowly  clear 
the  deck;  Bui  retreated  to  the  forecastle 
with  a  few  of  his  men,  but  he  was  sur- 
rounded now,  and  his  foes  closed  in.  The 
old  warrior  fought  on  steadily;  Sigurd 
caught  a  glimpse  of  his  father  in  single 
combat  with  a  gigantic  Norseman,  wield- 
ing an  axe.  Bui  slipped,  and  the  axe 
whirled  above  him  and  fell  on  his  helmet, 
wounding  him  terribly ;  but  recovering,  Bui 
cut  down  his  foe,  then  leaped  to  the  rail. 

"  Overboard,  all  Bui's  men  !"  rang  out  his 
voice,  loudly.  Just  then  the  fight  closed  in 
on  Vagn  afresh,  but  Sigurd  caught  a  flash 
of  armor,  and  knew  that  his  father  had 
died  as  a  viking  should,  beneath  the  waves. 

The  Jomsborg  ships  broke  up  now,  each 
fighting  desperately  to  the  last.  One  by 
one  they  were  boarded  and  swept  clean  of 
men,  and  at  length  it  came  the  turn  of 
Vagn's  ship. 


28 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


Then,  as  the  Norsemen  swept  over  the 
side,  the  vikings  put  sword  and  axe  in  play 
for  the  first  time,  the  boys  at  their  head. 
Time  after  time  the  flood  poured  across  the 
bulwarks,  and  time  after  time  the  Jomsborg 
steel  stemmed  the  tide  and  drove  it  back. 
At  last  a  wild  yell  arose  behind  them,  and 
those  of  the  crew  who  were  left  retreated 
slowly  to  the  forecastle,  fighting  desper- 
ately. 

A  very  handsome  man,  of  lofty  stature, 
swept  over  the  prow  with  his  men,  and  cut 
his  way  to  Vagn.  The  two  met  with  a 
clash  of  swords,'and  the  tall  man,  evidently 
a  leader  of  note,  fell  beneath  Vagn's  blows ; 
he  was  up  again,  however,  and  his  men 
swiftly  closed  around  Vagn.  Sigurd  gave 
a  shout  of  rage,  and  sprang  to  his  friend's 
side,  but  too  late. 

The  sea  of  fierce  faces  swept  down  on 
him,  but  recoiled  before  the  Jomsborg  axes. 
Vagn  lay  motionless,  and  Sigurd,  bestrid- 
ing his  body,  faced  the  handsome  leader, 
axe  in  hand.  The  other's  sword  flashed, 
and  for  a  moment  Sigurd  was  hard  put  to 
it  to  ward  off  the  storm  of  blows;  then  his 
axe  fell  on  the  other's  helm,  and  the  man 
staggered  back.  Before  he  could  follow  up 
his  advantage,  Sigurd  slipped  in  a  pool  of 
blood — he  saw  a  sword  whirled  above  him, 
gave  his  battle-cry  once  more — and  sank 
across  the  body  of  Vagn. 

With  the  fall  of  Vagn  and  Sigurd,  the 
battle  was  over.  Thirty-five  ships  had  fled 
with  Sigvald,  twenty-five  had  remained 
with  Bui  and  Vagn.  One  by  one  they  were 
boarded  and  cleared,  for  Jarl  Hakon  gave 
no  quarter;  one  by  one  they  floated  out  of 
the  whirl,  empty  but  for  dying  and  dead. 
The  vikings  died  beneath  sword  and  spear, 
or  followed  Bui's  example  and  plunged  be- 
neath the  waves,  while  far  in  the  distance 
the  white  sails  of  Sigvald  glittered  awhile 
and  then  vanished  to  the  south. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

HOW   VAGN    KEPT    HIS   VOW. 


44rT^HAT  is  all,  I  think;  twenty  of 
them.  No,  this  one  stirred  some- 
what. Here,  lift  him  up." 

Sigurd  opened  his  eyes.  Over  him  were 
bending  two  men,  one  his  handsome  oppo- 
nent, the  other  —  Thorkel  Leira.  The  boy 
struggled  to  his  feet,  the  former  assisting. 

It  was  only  mid-afternoon,  the  storm 
had  passed,  and  about  the  Jomsborg  ships 
lay  the  Norse  fleet.  Glancing  around, 
Sigurd  saw  the  decks  heaped  with  dead, 
and  in  the  waist  of  the  ship  was  a  little 
group  of  Jomsvikings,  their  arms  bound. 
Then  he  remembered  Vagn. 

Thorkel  Leira  was  holding  a  horn  of 
water  to  Vagn's  lips,  and  as  Sigurd,  weak 
and  dizzy,  knelt  at  his  friend's  side,  he 
wondered  why  Thorkel  thus  aided  his  dead- 
ly enemy.  He  was  soon  to  know. 

Vagn  looked  up.  As  he  caught  sight  of 
Thorkel  he  dashed  the  horn  aside  and 
struggled  up  on  Sigurd's  arm.  Before  he 
could  speak,  however,  a  group  of  men  ap- 
proached and  bound  the  boys'  arms,  under 
the  orders  of  the  handsome  chief.  Then 
they  were  led  into  the  waist  of  the  ship 
and  joined  the  others. 

The  men  gave  a  murmur  of  joy.  "  It 
was  a  noble  fight,  eh,  Vagn?"  muttered  an 
old  viking,  Biorn  of  Bretland,  or  Wales. 
"  I  have  fought  for  twenty  years  under  your 
father  Aki  and  your  grandfather  Palnatoki, 
and  I  never  saw  a  greater  battle  than  this." 

"It  is  a  sad  one  for  the  brotherhood, 
Biorn,"  replied  Vagn  weakly,  "  when  the 
Jarl  himself  turned  tail  and  fled." 

A  murmur  of  anger  ran  around  the 
group,  then  Sigurd  asked,  "  Who  is  the  tall 
man,  and  what  will  they  do  with  us?" 

Biorn  nodded  toward  some  small  boats 
near  by.  "  They  are  taking  us  on  shore,  I 
know  not  why.  Neither  do  I  know  the 
man." 

A  group  of  Norsemen  approached,  and 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


29 


the  captives  were  led  to  the  boats,  which 
were  swiftly  rowed  to  the  shore.  Here, 
upon  a  long  fallen  tree,  sat  the  Jomsborg 
men,  with  their  feet  bound  in  a  long  rope; 
but  their  hands  were  left  free. 

The  Norsemen  surrounded  them,  bind- 
ing up  wounds,  exchanging  rough  jests  on 
the  battle,  and  examining  with  awe  and 
wonder  these  vikings  whose  name  was  so 
famous,  and  who  had  fought  so  stoutly 
against  such  great  odds. 

Presently  the  tall  man  and  Thorkel 
Leira  landed.  "  I  have  it,  Sigurd !"  cried 
Vagn.  "  That  handsome  man  must  be  Jarl 
Eirik,  Hakon's  son !" 

At  that  instant  the  handsome  man  came 
up  to  the  captives. 

"  You  fought  well  and  stoutly,  Jomsvik- 
ings,"  he  said,  "  and  I  am  in  truth  sorry 
that  Jarl  Hakon  has  ordered  that  no  quar- 
ter be  given,  for  I  would  fain  spare  your 
lives  if  I  might." 

"  It  is  the  fortune  of  war,"  replied  Vagn, 
smiling  bravely.  "  Had  we  conquered,  I 
do  not  think  that  Sigvald  would  have 
spared  Hakon  either,  yet  Christian  men 
have  more  merciful  customs  than  you  who 
follow  Thor  and  Odin." 

The  other  flushed  slightly,  turning  to 
Thorkel.  "  It  is  not  to  my  taste,  Thorkel, 
to  slay  these  helpless  men  thus." 

Thorkel  smiled  his  cunning,  cruel  smile. 
"  It  is  much  to  my  taste,  Jarl,  to  slay  Vagn 
Akison !" 

At  this  Vagn  cried  out,  "  Yet  you  feared 
to  stand  before  me  in  battle,  Thorkel !  Say, 
will  you  loose  my  bonds  and  meet  me  now 
with  sword  or  axe?" 

A  murmur  of  assent  arose  from  the 
Norsemen  who  stood  around,  but  Thorkel 
shook  his  head,  as  he  fingered  the  big  axe 
in  his  hand. 

As  Thorkel  withdrew  to  speak  with  the 
handsome  man  for  a  moment,  old  Biorn 
leaned  over  and  whispered  excitedly  to 
Sigurd:  "It  is  just  a  chance,  Fairhair,  so 
try  it." 


Sigurd  nodded  as  Thorkel  returned. 
"  Best  begin  with  the  chiefs,  Thorkel,"  he 
cried,  although  his  heart  beat  madly,  for 
if  Biorn's  plan  did  not  work  nothing  could 
save  his  life.  Thorkel  advanced  and  stood 
in  front  of  him. 

"  Since  you  are  in  haste  to  die,  let  it  be 
so." 

"  Wait !"  exclaimed  Sigurd,  as  the  man 
swung  his  axe  aloft.  "  Let  someone  hold  my 
hair,  lest  it  be  defiled  and  soiled." 

A  Norseman,  with  a  word  of  admiration 
at  the  lad's  bravery,  stepped  forward  and 
gathered  up  the  boy's  long,  fair  hair  in  his 
hands,  and  the  axe  swung. 

As  it  descended,  Sigurd  jerked  his  body 
so  strongly  to  one  side  that  the  axe  was 
buried  in  the  earth,  and  Thorkel  lost  his 
balance  and  fell  forward.  A  laugh  went 
up  from  the  crowd  as  the  angry  man  rose, 
but  the  handsome  chief  advanced  and  held 
his  arm. 

"  Who  are  you,  handsome  lad  ?" 

"  I  am  called  Sigurd,  and  am  Bui's  son," 
replied  Sigurd,  looking  up  to  the  other's 
eyes,  which  met  his  in  admiration.  "  The 
Jomsborg  men  are  not  yet  all  dead !" 

"  Truly  you  are  a  son  of  Bui !"  exclaimed 
the  other.  "  Will  you  take  life  and  peace 
from  me?" 

"  If  you  have  the  power  to  give  it,"  an- 
swered Sigurd. 

The  man  drew  himself  up.  "  He  offers 
who  has  power  to  give — Jarl  Eirik  Hakon- 
son." 

"Thanks,  Jarl,"  replied  Sigurd,  with  a 
breath  of  relief,  "I  will  accept  it."  The 
whisper  of  old  Biorn  had  proved  true. 

Thorkel,  with  a  dark  frown,  plucked  up 
his  axe,  and  cried  angrily,  "  Though  you 
spare  all  these  men,  Eirik,  Vagn  shall  not 
escape  me !" 

With  that  he  raised  the  axe.  As  the 
weapon  whirled,  Biorn  flung  himself 
against  Thorkel's  knees.  The  man  stum- 
bled, the  axe  fell;  and  Vagn,  springing  up 
in  a  flash,  seized  it  and  fulfilled  his  vow. 


30 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


A  great  shout  of  applause  rang  out,  for 
above  all  things  Norsemen  love  a  brave 
deed.  They  crowded  around  admiringly, 
and  Jarl  Eirik  with  a  smile,  said,  "  Will 
you  also  take  life,  Vagn  ?" 

"  That  I  will,"  answered  Vagn,  "  if  you 
will  also  give  it  to  my  men  as  well." 

"  Loose  them  from  the  rope,"  commanded 
the  Jarl,  and  it  was  done. 

By  this  time  evening  was  coming  on,  and 
the  Norsemen  hastily  made  a  camp  on  the 
shore ;  Jarl  Hakon  was  encamped  across 
the  bay.  The  men  sat  around  the  fires  and 
talked  in  low  tones,  and  presently  the  two 
boys  were  summoned  to  the  fire  of  the  Jarl. 

Eirik  greeted  them  with  a  winning  smile. 
"  Sit  down  and  eat,  friends,  for  I  have 
somewhat  to  think  over.  My  father  gave 
express  commands  that  no  Jomsviking  was 
to  be  spared ;  why  I  gave  you  life  I  know 
not,  save  that  you  were  but  boys,  and  full  of 
courage.  Now,  whither  would  you  go?" 

Vagn  looked  at  Sigurd.  The  latter 
nodded,  and  Vagn  told  Eirik  the  story  of 
Ulf  and  Astrid,  who  were  waiting  a  few 
miles  away.  When  he  finished  the  Jarl 
sat  in  thought  for  a  moment. 

"  Here  is  my  counsel.  If  I  send  you  both 
off  together,  my  father  will  send  a  ship 
after  you  to  slay  you,  and  I  will  not  have 
my  promise  broken.  I  go  home  from  here 
by  land  to  the  mountains,  and  so  to  my  own 
earldom.  I  would  advise  that  you,  Vagn, 
come  with  me,  for  I  can  protect  you,  and 
let  Sigurd  rejoin  Ulf  with  the  eighteen 
Jomsvikings  who  are  left.  I  will  send  you 
home,  Vagn,  within  a  month  at  most." 

"  That  is  a  good  plan,"  exclaimed  Vagn. 
"Do  you  not  think  so,  Fairhair?" 

Sigurd  assented,  though  he  disliked  to 
part  with  his  cousin;  but  there  was  no  help 
for  it,  and  so  it  was  decided. 

Early  the  next  morning  the  Jomsborg 
men  and  Sigurd  ran  out  three  small  boats 
and  said  farewell  to  Vagn.  Eirik  armed 
them  all  well,  and  made  them  many  pres- 
ents; and  as  they  pushed  off  Vagn  stood  on 


the  shore,  waving  farewell. 

"  I'll  see  you  at  Jomsborg  next  month," 
called  Sigurd.  "  Farewell !" 

Under  a  fair  wind  the  three  boats  ran 
quickly  down  the  bay,  rounded  the  end  of 
Hod  Island,  and  arrived  in  an  hour  at  the 
Herey  Islands.  Steering  in  between  the 
largest  and  smallest,  they  reached  into  the 
bay,  and  there  before  them  lay  the  "  Otter." 

A  shout  of  greeting  came  to  them,  and 
as  they  pulled  up  to  the  side  Ulf  Ringsson 
sprang  on  the  rail. 

"  What  news  of  the  battle  ?    Who  won  ?" 

Sigurd  pointed  to  his  men,  all  of  them 
wounded.  "  These  are  all  left  of  the  Joms- 
vikings," he  replied.  A  cry  of  horror  went 
up,  and  Ulf  staggered  back. 

"  Impossible  !  Where  is  your  father  Bui, 
Jarl  Sigvald,  Vagn  Akison,  Aslak  Holms- 
kalle  ?  They  cannot  be  dead  !" 

"  Some  are  even  worse  off,"  said  Sigurd, 
climbing  the  rail  wearily.  "  Vagn  is  safe, 
my  father  is  dead  with  Aslak,  and  Sigvald 
and  his  men  have  fled  home  again." 

While  Astrid  greeted  Sigurd,  and  his 
wounded  and  weary  men  clambered  on 
board,  Ulf  remained  stunned  with  amaze- 
ment. "Fled!  Fled!"  he  muttered.  "The 
Jarl  himself  false  to  his  vows !" 

He  could  not  believe  it;  for  it  was  the 
most  sacred  law  of  Jomsborg  that  no  viking 
should  turn  his  back  to  a  foe.  Sigurd  told 
of  the  fight,  while  the  excited  sailors  ques- 
tioned his  men,  and  as  he  finished  Astrid 
sprang  forward. 

"  You  are  wounded,  Sigurd !  See,  your 
arm  is  all  red,  and  your  head  is  bloody !" 

"  Yes,  bind  it  up,"  laughed  Sigurd  bitter- 
ly, "  for  the  Jomsborg  rules  are  shattered 
with  the  brotherhood  forever !"  Then  he 
reeled,  and  would  have  fallen  save  for  the 
strong  hand  of  Ulf. 

They  carried  him  to  the  cabin,  and  while 
the  men  set  sail,  Ulf,  who  was  skilled  as  a 
leech,  extracted  the  broken  arrow-head  and 
bound  up  the  wound.  The  other,  on  his 
head,  was  not  dangerous,  and  Sigurd  soon 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


31 


"Never  mind,  ice  will  soon  be  back  ainiin  with  good  Queen  Gun'hild." 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


33 


fell  into  a  deep  sleep,  not  waking  till  the 
afternoon. 

The  rocking  of  the  ship  told  him  that 
they  were  out  at  sea,  so  he  hastened  on 
deck;  to  his  surprise,  the  land  was  out  of 
sight,  and  a  heavy  gale  was  blowing. 

"So  you  are  awake!"  cried  Astrid.  "How 
do  you  feel?" 

"  Ready  for  another  battle,"  laughed 
Sigurd,  then  his  brow  clouded  over  as  he 
thought  of  his  father.  Astrid,  divining  his 
thoughts,  was  silent  for  a  moment,  then 
changed  the  subject. 

"  We  had  no  sooner  left  the  land  than 
this  gale  broke  on  us,  and  Ulf  says  that  it 
is  growing  stronger  every  minute." 

Sigurd  looked  around.  Indeed,  the  gale 
was  a  heavy  northeaster,  and  now  he 
noticed  that  the  sail  was  close-reefed,  and 
that  everything  was  stowed  away  save  the 
three  boats  in  which  he  had  come  to  the 
"  Otter,"  which  were  lashed  securely  in 
the  shelter  of  the  high  stern. 

"  Hello,  I'm  glad  to  see  you  around  so 
soon !"  cried  Ulf  cheerily,  and  the  boy 
gripped  his  hand  in  thanks. 

"  If  Jarl  Hakon  were  here,  Ulf,  he  would 
say  that  Ran,  the  ocean  queen,  was  trying  to 
complete  the  work  begun  by  Thor  and  Odin 
at  Hiorunga  Bay." 

Sigurd  smiled  at  Astrid,  but  the  captain 
looked  about  anxiously. 

"  We  are  in  for  a  bad  blow,  Sigurd.  It 
is  good  that  the  '  Otter '  is  stanch,  for  to 
tell  you  the  truth,  we  are  far  from  our 
course  for  Denmark,  and  it  may  well  be 
that  we  shall  be  driven  farther  still." 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

"  SKOAL,  TO   KING  OLAF  !" 

MUCH   as  they  loved  the  keen  wind 
and  dash  of  the  spray,  Sigurd  and 
Astrid  were  soon  driven  from  their 
post  in  the  bow  of  the  "  Otter,"  for  the  seas 


began  rolling  up  tremendously,  and  they 
were  forced  to  seek  the  shelter  of  the  cabin. 
The  men  were  all  stowed  away  below,  save 
for  the  watch  on  duty,  and  as  the  "  Otter  " 
was  a  stanch  vessel,  and  Ulf  a  good  cap- 
tain, Sigurd  had  no  fear  but  that  they 
would  outride  the  storm  safely. 

"  How  strange  it  all  seems !"  remarked 
Astrid  that  evening.  "  Only  a  few  short 
weeks  ago  we  were  all  together  at  the  heir- 
ship  feast  of  my  uncle,  and  now  the  Joms- 
borg  power  is  shattered,  Vagn  is  far  off  in 
Norway,  and  here  we  are  driving  no  one 
knows  where,  over  the  sea !  I  wonder  what 
became  of  your  falcon  !" 

Sigurd  laughed.  "  I  wonder  what ! 
Never  mind,  we  will  soon  be  back  again 
with  good  Queen  Gunhild.  Hello!  how 
goes  it,  Ulf?" 

The  captain  entered,  dripping  with  brine, 
and  shook  his  head.  "  Badly,  Sigurd.  It  is 
fully  the  worst  storm  I  ever  saw,  and  I 
was  a  fool  for  ever  putting  to  sea  at  this 
time  of  year.  However,  we  must  trust  in 
God  and  do  our  best  to  weather  it." 

So  for  five  days  the  "  Otter  "  scudded  be- 
fore the  gale,  utterly  helpless.  There  was 
plenty  of  work  for  all,  however,  for  the 
giant  seas  swept  the  low  hull  repeatedly, 
and  everyone  was  kept  busy  bailing  the 
ship,  from  morning  to  night.  It  was  lucky, 
indeed,  that  the  eighteen  Jomsvikings  had 
come  aboard  with  Sigurd,  for  as  it  was  all 
were  so  exhausted  by  the  constant  labor 
that  they  worked  mechanically,  and  at  the 
end  of  every  watch  they  lashed  themselves 
to  the  bulwarks  and  dropped  to  sleep  at 
once. 

On  the  fifth  evening  Sigurd  was  sitting  in 
the  cabin,  talking  to  Astrid,  when  they  were 
startled  by  a  loud  crash,  followed  by  shouts 
and  cries.  Sigurd  ran  out  on  deck. 

"  The  mast !"  shouted  Ulf  in  his  ear. 
Sigurd  turned  and  saw  only  a  ragged  stump. 
Ulf  motioned  him  inside,  for  the  gale  blew 
all  words  away,  and  when  the  door  was 
closed  cried  in  despair, 


34 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


"  Sigurd,  I  have  done  my  best !  Had  the 
mast  held  we  would  have  been  safe,  for  the 
storm  is  breaking,  I  think ;  but  an  hour  since 
I  saw  land  in  the  west,  and  we  cannot  beat 
off  now." 

"  Know  you  what  land  it  was  ?"  inquired 
Astrid.  Ulf  shook  his  head  despondently. 

"  For  aught  I  know,  it  may  be  Scotland, 
or  the  Fareys,  or  the  Orkneys,  or  even 
that  Vinland  which  the  Icelanders  say  Eirik 
the  Red  discovered.  I  am  lost,  and  we 
are  in  the  hands  of  God." 

Presently  Ulf  went  out  again,  and  man- 
aged to  rig  enough  canvas  to  the  stump  of 
the  mast  to  keep  the  "  Otter's  "  head  before 
the  wind.  In  this  fashion  they  drove  ahead 
all  night,  and  with  daybreak  a  long  line  of 
cliffs  was  disclosed,  straight  ahead,  and 
only  a  few  miles  away. 

As  they  stood  watching  on  the  forecastle, 
Astrid  pulled  at  Sigurd's  arm.  "  Why 
can't  we  escape  in  those  boats,  when  the 
'Otter'  drives  ashore?"  she  shouted  in  his 
ear,  pointing  to  the  three  boats  lashed  in 
the  stern.  This  had  not  occurred  to  Sigurd 
or  Ulf,  because  the  viking  ships  themselves 
were  so  small  that  they  rarely  carried  boats, 
as  they  could  be  drawn  up  on  shore  easily 
enough. 

"  Hurrah  !  Good  idea,  Astrid  !"  Sigurd 
hastened  to  Ulf's  side,  but  the  latter 
shrugged  his  shoulders  at  the  plan. 

"  To  what  end  ?  We  will  only  be  putting 
off  death  for  a  few  minutes;  once  we  drive 
on  those  cliffs  and  it  will  be  over." 

Nevertheless,  at  Sigurd's  urging  the  boats 
were  made  ready,  for  although  the  storm 
was  breaking  they  were  fast  nearing  the 
shore.  Into  each  boat  were  put  arms  and 
food,  well  secured. 

"  We  must  leave  before  she  strikes," 
shouted  Ulf,  "  else  the  seas  will  sweep 
boats  and  all  away." 

Sigurd  nodded,  and  returned  to  Astrid. 
The  cliffs  were  not  a  mile  away  now,  and 
they  could  see  the  white  spray  flying  high 
from  the  dark  rocks.  Presently  Ulf 


motioned  to  them,  and  they  descended  into 
the  waist  of  the  ship,  joining  the  crowd 
about  the  boats.  Sigurd  took  command  of 
one,  Ulf  of  another,  and  Biorn  of  Bretland 
commanded  the  third;  then  all  awaited  the 
word.  The  "  Otter  "  was  low  in  the  water 
now,  and  it  would  be  no  great  task  to  launch 
the  boats  over  her  side. 

Presently  Ulf  gave  a  sharp  command. 
"  Out !"  The  six  men  assigned  to  each  boat 
lifted  it,  poised  it  an  instant  on  the  rail,  then 
as  a  giant  crest  foamed  along  the  three 
boats  were  borne  out  together.  A  man 
leaped  in  each,  and  fended  off  from  the 
"  Otter's  "  side  with  a  spear,  while  the  rest 
hastily  embarked. 

"  Farewell,  old  Otter !"  cried  Ulf,  the  last 
to  leave ;  and  as  they  swept  from  the  vessel 
they  saw  her  suddenly  lurch  and  reel  wildly. 

"  Just  in  time !"  said  Sigurd  to  Astrid, 
who  was  in  his  boat.  "  She  struck  then,  but 
scraped  over;  next  time — " 

While  he  was  speaking,  the  ship  heeled 
far  over  on  her  side,  amid  a  cloud  of  flying 
foam ;  but  they  could  not  watch  her  further, 
for  now  they  were  fighting  for  their  own 
lives.  Sigurd  was  at  the  tiller,  and  he  fol- 
lowed Ulf  closely,  while  the  men  rowed 
steadily.  The  seas  swept  them  in  under  the 
cliffs,  and  Ulf  suddenly  raised  his  hand  and 
waved  it.  Straight  at  the  high  walls  his 
boat  darted,  and  then  Sigurd  saw  a  little 
stretch  of  beach  before  them  as  he  swept  in. 

With  a  last  stroke  the  men  drove  the 
boats  up,  then  leaped  out  and  drew  them  up. 
Sigurd  carried  Astrid  up  the  beach  and 
looked  around.  The  cliffs  did  not  seem  so 
steep  now,  and  Sigurd  realized  that  they 
would  be  able  to  climb  them,  just  as  Ulf 
joined  him.  The  captain  was  in  more  hope- 
ful spirits  now. 

"  Your  plan  certainly  saved  us,  lady,"  he 
exclaimed  to  Astrid.  "  I  had  given  up  hope 
— strange  I  did  not  think  of  those  boats 
myself.  But  we  so  seldom  use  small  boats 
that  I  never  gave  them  a  thought.  Now, 
Fairhair,  what  had  we  best  do?" 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


35 


Sigurd  looked  out  to  sea,  where  the  hull 
of  the  "  Otter  "  was  fast  breaking  up  under 
the  smashing  blows  of  the  waves.  "  Well, 
I  think  we  had  better  take  the  arms  and 
food  from  the  boats,  scale  those  cliffs,  and 
see  where  we  are.  We  have  over  a  score 
of  well-armed  men,  and  the  folk,  whoever 
they  are,  will  hesitate  before  molesting  us." 

Ulf  turned  and  gave  the  necessary  orders, 
then,  followed  by  Biorn  and  the  rest,  they 
made  for  the  cliffs.  These,  as  Sigurd  had 
foreseen,  offered  no  great  difficulties  to  the 
Norsemen,  who  were  all  used  to  climbing 
about  their  native  fiords,  and  in  half  an  hour 
they  stood  on  the  brow  and  looked  about. 

Before  them  lay  a  heavily  wooded  coun- 
try, rolling  with  small  hills  and  valleys,  but 
without  a  sign  of  habitation.  The  storm 
was  nearly  over  now,  and  while  the  seas  still 
rolled  mountain-high  below  them,  the  sun 
was  just  breaking  thrpugh  the  clouds,  and 
in  the  distance  they  caught  the  sheen  of  a 
river.  The  men  hailed  the  sun  with  a  cry 
of  delight,  and  Ulf  pointed  to  the  river. 

"  Let  us  make  for  that,  Sigurd,  and  there 
we  can  have  fresh  water  and  a  meal.  After 
that  we  can  decide  what  to  do." 

So,  striking  away  from  the  sea,  they  en- 
tered, the  forest.  It  was  the  end  of  autumn 
now,  and  though  the  leaves  had  fallen  from 
many  of  the  trees,  the  forest  was  composed 
in  great  part  of  pines,  fresh  and  green. 
Even  Biorn  looked  puzzled  as  he  tried  to 
make  out  the  country. 

"  I  do  not  think  it  is  Scotland."  he  said, 
"  and  certainly  it  is  neither  the  Fareys  nor 
the  Orkneys.  It  is  not  my  own  land  of 
Wales,  for  that  was  far  from  our  course; 
it  might  be  Ireland,  but  I  have  never  been 
in  that  land." 

"  Ireland  !"  cried  Astrid.  "  Why,  isn't 
that  where  men  say  Olaf  Tryggveson  is 
king?" 

"  So  it  is,"  rejoined  Sigurd,  "but  it  must 
be  a  wide  land,  and  we  have  small  hope  of 
finding  Northmen  here." 

"  Well,"  remarked  Ulf,  "  we  can  but  push 


on  boldly.  If  we  are  indeed  in  Ireland,  we 
are  lucky,  for  men  say  that  in  that  country 
there  is  the  finest  civilization  in  Europe — " 

"  There  used  to  be,  Ulf,"  growled  old 
Biorn,  "  just  as  there  used  to  be  in  Wales, 
my  own  land ;  but  the  heathen  vikings  have 
well-nigh  destroyed  it  all." 

Soon  they  come  out  on  the  banks  of  a  wide 
and  sluggish  river,  and  with  cries  of  joy  the 
men  rushed  down  to  the  bank  and  plunged 
in,  drinking  greedily  and  washing  the  salt 
brine  from  their  bodies.  Sigurd  filled  a 
horn  for  Astrid,  but  as  she  returned  it  a 
shout  broke  from  Biorn : 

"  Back  !    Back  !    Out  swords,  men  !" 

At  the  same  moment  a  flight  of  arrows 
fell  among  the  men,  striking  down  two  of 
the  sailors,  and  a  wild  yell  reechoed  from 
the  trees.  The  Jomsvikings,  protected  by 
their  byrnies  and  helmets,  hastily  scrambled 
up  the  bank  and  fell  into  line  around  the 
leaders,  the  others  forming  behind  them. 

Dark  forms  flitted  among  the  trees,  and 
Sigurd  called  out,  "  Shield  to  shield,  men  ! 
Hold  your  spears  ready  for  the  word." 

The  vikings'  bows  were  useless,  the 
strings  having  been  soaked,  so  they  waited 
helplessly.  Arrows  fell  thickly,  but  Sigurd 
covered  Astrid  with  his  shield,  and  they 
did  no  further  harm.  Then,  with  a  yell,  a 
crowd  of  men  broke  out  of  the  forest;  they 
were  clad  in  woolen  tunics,  a  few  wore 
armor,  while  all  held  spears  and  axes.  As 
they  charged,  Sigurd  gave  the  word. 

The  attackers  broke  as  the  heavy  Joms- 
borg  spears  sent  half  a  dozen  to  the 
ground ;  but  as  they  did  so  a  war-horn  rang 
out  behind  them,  and  a  voice  cried  in 
Norse,  "  At  them,  men  !  For  the  Cross  !" 

Through  the  forest  glades  swept  a  band 
of  steel-clad  men,  driving  the  others  be- 
fore them  in  headlong  flight.  As  pursuers 
and  pursued  vanished  amid  the  trees,  their 
leader  approached  the  little  band  of  ship- 
wrecked men. 

Although  Sigurd  was  tall,  he  noted  with 
surprise  that  this  man  was  a  good  head  and 


36 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


shoulders  abovie  him,  and  broad  in  propor- 
tion. His  features  were  frank  and  open, 
his  eyes  blue  and  piercing,  and  his  hair  was 
red-gold,  waving  over  his  golden  armor. 
He  wore  a  blue  cloak,  a  gold  helm  and  gold- 
linked  byrnie,  and  on  his  shield  was  a  great 
cross  in  red. 

"  Are  you  Christian  men  ?"  he  asked,  as 
he  drew  near,  fixing  his  eyes  on  Sigurd. 

"  That  we  are,"  cried  the  latter,  joyfully. 
"  Where  are  we  ?  Who  are  you  who  res- 
cued us  so  opportunely?" 

"  You  are  on  the  coast  of  Ireland,  and  my 
city  of  Dublin  is  only  three  miles  distant. 
These  Irish  would  never  have  dared  come 
so  near  had  they  not  thought  me  absent 
from  home  on  a  cruise.  I  am  Olaf,  son  of 
King  Tryggve  of  Norway." 

At  this  the  Jomsvikings  gazed  in  wonder 
on  the  handsome  chief;  then  with  a  blast 
on  his  war-horn  old  Biorn  led  the  shout: 

"  Skoal  to  King  Olaf  !     Skoal !" 


CHAPTER  IX. 
HOW  ASTRID  FARED  FORTH. 

HANKS,  friends!"  smiled  Olaf, 
and  Sigurd  thought  that  never  in 
all  his  life  had  he  seen  so  hand- 
some and  kingly  a  man.  "  Who  are  you, 
young  sir?  And  who  are  these  men? 
Truly,  I  have  seldom  beheld  so  fine  a  set  of 
warriors,  wounded  though  they  are !" 

"  I  am  Sigurd  Buisson  of  Bornholm, 
King,  and  with  me  is  Astrid  of  Vendland, 
niece  of  Gunhild  of  Denmark.  This  is  Ulf 
Ringsson,  captain  of  our  ship,  and  as  for 
my  men,  they  are  the  last  of  the  Jomsvik- 
ings." 

"  What !"  Olaf's  eyes  opened  in  amaze- 
ment, and  he  threw  down  his  weapons. 
"  Tell  me  your  tale,  quickly !  I  heard  of 
Svein's  accession  feast,  but  nothing  of  what 
followed.  Has  Sigvald,  then,  won  Nor- 
way?" 


Sigurd  told  of  the  battle  at  Hiorunga 
Bay,  and  Olaf's  face  darkened.  As  he  con- 
cluded, the  Norsemen  of  Olaf  returned  and 
all  took  up  the  march  for  Dublin,  Sigurd's 
men  mingling  with  the  others. 

While  they  walked  along  Olaf  told  them 
of  how  he  had  fled  to  Russia  when  his  father 
was  murdered,  how  he  had  become  a  viking, 
wandering  the  ocean,  and  how  he  had  been 
baptized.  Then  he  had  come  to  Ireland  and 
won  the  kingdom  of  Dublin,  ruling  it  to- 
gether with  his  brother-in-law,  Olaf 
Kvaran. 

"  We  saw  your  ship  from  the  castle,"  he 
explained,  "  so  I  came  out  to  aid  any  who 
might  escape.  Now,  what  do  you  intend 
doing?" 

"  As  to  that,"  returned  Sigurd,  "  I  care 
little ;  but  the  Lady  Astrid  here  must  be 
returned  home." 

"Then  will  you  be  my  man?"  inquired 
Olaf. 

"  That  will  I !"  Sigurd  turned  to  his 
men  and  called,  "  Listen,  Jomsvikings ! 
What  say  you  to  taking  service  with  King 
Olaf?" 

"  Aye  !"  the  shout  went  up,  with  clashing 
of  arms,  and  Olaf  smiled.  "  That  pleases 
me  well,  Sigurd,  for  a  few  Jomsborg  men 
are  worth  a  hundred  others.  As  to  Astrid, 
she  must  take  her  chance;  it  is  too  late  in 
the  season  for  ships  now,  and  I  fear  she 
must  remain  with  us  till  spring.  However, 
that  can  wait;  there  is  the  city." 

As  they  left  a  valley,  Dublin  lay  before 
them,  and  the  Jomsborg  men  cried  out  in 
surprise,  for  the  town  was  very  beautiful, 
and  defended  with  strong  walls  and  towers 
such  as  they  had  seldom  seen.  Soon  they 
were  riding  through  the  streets,  and  the 
men  were  quartered  in  the  palace,  where 
Olaf  also  assigned  rooms  to  Ulf,  Sigurd 
and  Astrid. 

Olaf  sent  fresh  and  new  garments  to 
all,  and  soon  they  rejoined  him  in  the  great 
hall  for  the  midday  meal.  Here  Olaf  in- 
troduced them  to  Queen  Gyda,  his  brother- 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


37 


in-law,  and  one  or  two  of  his  chief  men, 
and  soon  they  were  all  chatting  .iway  mer- 
rily, forgetful  of  their  past  troubles. 

After  the  meal  Sigurd  led  his  Jomsborg 
men  into  the  hall,  up  to  the  high  seat  of 
Olaf.  Kneeling,  Sigurd  placed  his  hands 
between  those  of  the  King,  and  swore  to 
obey  him  and  to  be  his  man.  One  by  one 
the  rest  followed  his  example,  and  when 
the  ceremony  was  over  Olaf  presented  each 
man  with  a  shield,  ornamented  with  a  large 
red  cross;  but  to  Sigurd  he  gave  a  mag- 
nificent golden  helmet,  on  top  of  which  was 
wrought  a  dragon  in  the  same  metal,  its 
wings  outstretched  and  sweeping  far  back. 

"  I  won  this  helm  in  Russia,"  smiled  the 
King,  "  so  see  that  the  dragon  bears  his 
face  ever  toward  my  foes  !" 

Sigurd  was  overjoyed  with  the  gift, 
which  was  a  helm  worthy  a  king,  and 
thanked  Olaf  most  sincerely.  The  next 
day  he  was  given  a  command  in  the  court- 
men,  or  bodyguard,  and  took  up  his  new 
duties. 

A  week  later  the  first  snow  fell,  but  as 
Astrid  had  given  up  all  hope  of  reaching 
home  before  spring,  she  did  not  mind  great- 
ly. Indeed,  Olaf's  court  was  a  pleasant, 
one,  and  both  Sigurd  and  Astrid  enjoyed 
themselves  immensely. 

Queen  Gyda  became  very  fond  of  Astrid, 
who  was  a  favorite  with  all  because  of  her 
sunny  disposition  and  gay  heart.  Sigurd's 
wound  soon  healed,  and  by  Yuletide  both 
had  adjusted  themselves  to  their  new  sur- 
roundings. 

Sigurd  grew  much  attached  to  King 
Olaf.  Olaf  was  high-tempered,  but  just, 
and  in  warlike  exercises  no  one  could  equal 
him.  Often  he  would  go  down  to  the  har- 
bor, bid  his  men  row  out  a  warship,  and 
then  while  the  oars  were  out  walk  along 
them.  Not  content  with  this,  he  would 
sometimes  juggle  knives  or  balls,  keeping 
his  balance  perfectly. 

He  took  great  interest  in  "  Fairhair,"  for 
Sigurd's  nickname  could  not  be  left  behind, 


and  himself  added  to  the  store  of  sword- 
tricks  the  boy  had  learned  in  the  school  at 
Jomsborg. 

Yuletide  passed,  and  a  few  weeks  later 
a  ship  drove  into  the  bay,  to  the  astonish- 
ment of  everyone,  for  the  ships  of  that  day 
did  not  often  venture  on  voyages  in  win- 
ter. The  new  arrivals  were  from  Norway, 
and  were  traders. 

It  happened  that  Ulf  had  not  heard  of 
the  ship,  and  as  he  sat  at  meat  that  evening 
he  leaped  to  his  feet  suddenly. 

"  What  is  that  man  who  just  passed  the 
door?"  he  exclaimed.  The  King  darted  a 
swift,  keen  look  at  the  captain,  and  replied : 

"  That  is  Thorir  Klakke,  who  arrived 
to-day  from  Norway  with  his  brother 
Ketil,  bearing  news  and  goods  for  trading." 

"  Then  beware  of  him,  Olaf,"  remarked 
Ulf,  "  for  I  have  often  seen  him  in  deep 
converse  with  Jarl  Hakon.  He  is  here  for 
no  good,  I  think." 

Shortly  after  this  Thorir  and  his  brother 
entered.  Both  men  were  short,  dark,  and 
well  dressed;  but  their  eyes  roved  about 
constantly  beneath  their  low  brows.  Ketil's 
face  in  particular  was  powerful,  yet  sullen. 

Thorir  started  slightly  at  sight  of  Sigurd, 
but  Olaf  greeted  him  kindly,  and  he  sat 
down  silently,  falling  into  low  converse 
with  his  brother.  For  several  days  nothing 
occurred,  save  that  Thorir  had  frequent 
audiences  with  Olaf;  but  at  every  meal 
Sigurd  noted  Ketil's  gaze  fixed  on  himself 
or  Astrid,  although  it  dropped  before  that 
of  Sigurd.  This  puzzled  him,  for  he  could 
not  see  why  Ketil  should  be  interested,  and 
it  also  angered  him,  for  he  saw  plainly  that 
Astrid  did  not  like  it. 

A  week  or  two  after  the  arrival  of  the 
Norsemen,  Olaf  and  Sigurd  were  talking 
together,  while  Astrid  and  the  Queen  were 
busy  with  their  sewing.  Suddenly  the  King 
exclaimed,  abruptly: 

"  Sigurd,  how  would  you  like  to  visit 
Norway  next  summer?" 

The  boy  started,  meeting  the  King's  eye 


38 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


eagerly.     "  Nothing  better,  my  lord  !" 

Olaf  smiled.  "  Well,  Thorir  urges  me  to 
take  the  realm  of  Norway  from  Hakon,  as 
is  my  right.  He  says  that  the  bonders  are 
not  satisfied  with  the  JarFs  rule  and  that  it 
would  be  an  easy  task  to  overthrow  him. 
What  think  you?" 

"Well,"  responded  Sigurd,  "if  Jarl 
Hakon  could  overthrow  the  might  of  Joms- 
borg,  methinks  it  would  go  hard  with  others 
who  attempt  his  kingdom." 

Here  Astrid,  who  had  been  listening 
earnestly,  broke  in :  "  Perhaps,  King  Olaf, 
Hakon  might  have  sent  this  man  to  bring 
you  into  his  power  !" 

Olaf  stared  at  Astrid  for  a  moment,  then 
his  blue  eyes  lit  up  with  a  fierce  light,  and 
his  fist  came  down  on  the  table.  "  As  I  am 
a  Christian  man,  that  is  it !  Beware, 
Thorir  Klakke !  If  I  go  to  Norway,  it 
will  not  be  as  your  master  expects !" 

"  Hakon  has  sixteen  Jarls  under  him," 
remarked  the  Queen,  "  and  some  of  them 
may  not  be  such  great  friends  of  his  by 
next  fall.  If  each  commands  one  of  the 
districts  of  the  kingdom,  you  may  find  an 
opening  in  that  way,  Olaf." 

The  King  nodded.  "  In  any  case,  I  will 
take  a  strong  force.  And  when  I  do  rule 
Norway,  I  swear  by  this  sword  that  I  will 
root  out  paganism  from  the  land,  and  bring 
the  country  under  the  Cross  of  the  white 
Christ !  The  Hammer  of  Thor  shall  vanish 
from  the  land  !" 

For  a  moment  the  King's  handsome  face 
was  stern,  and  filled  with  a  high  resolve; 
then  it  softened  again,  as  he  rose  and  bid 
Sigurd  good-night. 

A  few  days  later  the  boy  felt  the  bearing 
of  Ketil  becoming  intolerable,  and  he  re- 
solved to  warn  the  man  to  gaze  at  Astrid 
less  insolently.  It  was  his  watch  upon  the 
walls  that  night,  and  as  he  was  passing 
through  the  narrow  and  dark  streets,  three 
men  sprang  out  on  him,  from  a  doorway. 
Although  taken  by  surprise,  Sigurd  put  his 
back  to  a  wall,  and  drew  his  sword. 


His  light  shield  cracked  and  split  under 
the  furious  blows,  although  the  men  could 
only  attack  Sigurd  singly,  for  a  doorway 
on  either  side  of  him  afforded  some  protec- 
tion. Knowing  that  his  men  were  not  far, 
Sigurd  shouted  the  old  Jomsborg  call,  and 
at  this  the  three  assailants  redoubled  their 
efforts. 

Sigurd  caught  an  axe  blow  on  his  shield, 
which  sheared  it  from  his  arm;  but  his 
sword  fell  upon  the  other's  shoulder,  and 
with  a  muttered  curse  the  axe  fell.  Spring- 
ing out,  Sigurd  clove  the  helm  of  the  sec- 
ond man  with  one  quick  stroke,  but  he  re- 
ceived at  the  same  time  a  tremendous  blow 
from  the  sword  of  the  third  man.  The 
boy  staggered,  and  fell  over  the  body  of  the 
man  he  had  killed;  and  a  loud  shout  came 
from  the  corner,  with  torches  streaming  in 
the  lane,  which  put  the  assassins  to  flight. 

The  men  gave  a  shout  of  anger  as  they 
saw  Sigurd  lying  in  the  street,  but  the  men 
had  escaped,  and  Biorn  raised  Sigurd  ten- 
derly. The  latter,  thanks  to  the  gift  of 
Olaf,  was  unhurt,  but  a  dent  in  the  side 
of  the  helmet  bore  witness  to  the  blow's 
power. 

Biorn  turned  over  the  body  of  the  slain 
man,  and  the  men  gave  a  cry.  "  He  is  one 
of  the  crew  of  Thorir  Klakke!  To  the 
King !" 

"  Stop !"  shouted  Sigurd  as  the  vikings 
were  rushing  off.  "  Let  this  wait  till  morn- 
ing; they  cannot  escape,  and  the  King  dis- 
likes to  be  disturbed  from  his  sleep." 

They  yielded,  although  unwillingly,  and 
Sigurd  took  up  his  guard  again.  This  was 
to  be  an  eventful  night,  however,  for  two 
hours  after  midnight  one  of  the  harbor 
guards  ran  up  to  him,  and  cried: 

"  Sigurd,  Thorir  Klakke's  ship  is  leaving, 
and  will  not  answer  our  signals;  come 
quickly  !" 

Calling  to  Biorn,  Sigurd  ran  down  to  the 
harbor,  and  in  the  dim  light  could  see  the 
trading  vessel,  which  had  not  been  drawn 
up  on  shore,  slowly  making  her  way  to- 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


39 


ward  the  harbor  entrance,  for  the  port  was 
too  wide  to  freeze  far  from  shore. 

Without  wasting  time  in  hailing,  Sigurd 
sprang  into  a  light  skiff,  moored  at  the  edge 
of  the  ice,  set  a  dozen  men  at  the  oars, 
and  in  five  minutes  was  close  to  the  ship. 

"  Way  enough,  men,"  he  said,  then  lifted 
his  voice :  "  What  business  have  you  leav- 
ing Dublin  thus?  Come  back  and  give  an 
accounting!" 

At  this  the  oars  flashed  out  the  faster, 
and  a  mocking  voice  responded:  '  What, 
indeed,  young  cockerel?  Go  back  to  Joms- 
borg  and — " 

"Help,  Sigurd!  Help!"  broke  in  a  cry, 
"  they  have—" 

Silence  fell  again,  but  something  flashed 
into  the  water  beside  Sigurd's  boat,  and  as 
Biorn  picked  it  up,  the  boy  exclaimed: 

"  That  was  Astrid's  voice  !  Alongside, 
men  !" 

Only  a  mocking  laugh  answered,  as  the 
square  sail  rose  and  the  ship  filled  away. 
"  No  use,"  said  Biorn.  "  Better  return ; 
see,  I  have  picked  this  up."  He  held  out 
something  to  Sigurd. 

Now  Sigurd  and  Astrid  both  knew  the 
secret  of  Runic  writing,  which  only  the 
priests  and  high  chieftains  among  the 
Northmen  were  familiar  with ;  and  looking 
down  at  the  object,  Sigurd  saw  it  was  a  bit 
of  wood,  with  something  scratched  on  it. 
The  light  was  too  dim  to  see  further. 

"  Back  to  the  landing !"  cried  Sigurd,  a 
terrible  fear  in  his  heart.  "  Hasten  !" 

As  they  drew  ashore  he  leaped  out,  and 
held  the  piece  of  wood  up  to  the  light  of  a 
torch. 


CHAPTER  X. 
FAREWELL  TO  DUBLIN. 

BIORN      and      the     vikings      crowded 
around,  as  he  deciphered  the  scratches, 
for  they  were  unable  to  read  Runic, 
which  was  more  like  shorthand  than  any- 


thing else.  A  cry  of  dismay  burst  from 
Sigurd. 

"  Listen,  men  !  '  Ketil  bears  me  to  Eng- 
land !  Rescue,  Sigurd !'  Come,  men,  to 
the  palace !" 

"To  the  palace!  To  the  palace!"  They 
echoed  his  words,  and  the  terrible  Jomsborg 
battle-yell  startled  the  sleeping  town,  and 
pealed  up  to  the  castle. 

"  Bring  Thorir  Klakke,  but  harm  him 
not,"  commanded  Sigurd,  "  while  I  arouse 
the  king." 

Olaf,  however,  was  already  up,  wakened 
by  the  tumult.  Sword  in  hand,  he  entered 
the  great  hall  just  as  Sigurd  burst  in  at  the 
other  end. 

"  What  means  this  uproar?"  roared  Olaf, 
his  eyes  blazing  with  anger. 

"Justice  and  vengeance,  King!"  panted 
Sigurd,  as  he  handed  Olaf  the  bit  of  wood. 
Sheathing  his  weapon  with  a  frown,  Olaf 
took  the  object,  and  by  the  light  of  the 
torches  read  the  message. 

"  What  means  it?" 

"Astrid  of  Vendland  is  kidnaped,  Olaf, 
.and  I  was  set  upon  by  three  men  in  the 
streets.  One  I  killed,  and  he  was  a  man  of 
Thorir  Klakke's — stay,  here  is  Thorir 
now." 

Biorn  and  two  vikings  entered  the  hall 
behind  Sigurd,  leading  the  terrified  Thorir. 
Olaf,  grasping  the  whole  situation,  strode 
up  and  thundered  in  the  merchant's  ear: 

"  What  means  this  night's  work?  Where 
is  your  brother?" 

Thorir  stammered  out,  "  Indeed,  my  lord, 
I  know  not.  Is  he  not  in  his  rooms?" 
Then,  growing  bolder,  "  Am  I  accountable 
for  Ketil's  doings,  Olaf?  What  mean 
you?" 

Olaf  looked  into  the  man's  eyes  a  mo- 
ment, and  before  that  terrible  gaze  Thorir 
squirmed  helplessly,  but  did  not  weaken. 
"  Begone  to  your  rooms !"  said  the  King, 
contemptuously,  and  turned  abruptly  to 
Sigurd. 

"  Now  tell  me  the  tale  in  full." 


40 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


Sigurd  told  him  of  the  attack,  of  the 
flight  of  the  ship,  and  of  Astrid's  cry,  in  a 
few  words.  "  I  sent  men  to  her  rooms,"  he 
concluded.  "  Here  they  come  now." 

Close  on  his  words  the  men  entered, 
with  them  Queen  Gyda  and  some  of  her 
ladies.  Queen  Gyda,  who  had  learned  the 
cause  of  the  tumult  from  the  vikings,  told 
how  a  messenger  had  summonded  Astrid 
an  hour  before,  saying  that  Sigurd  was 
hurt  in  a  brawl,  and  how  the  girl  had  run 
out  hastily. 

"  Come  with  me,  quickly,"  ordered  the 
King,  and  Sigurd  followed  him  to  the  ram- 
parts of  the  castle.  The  dawn  was  just 
breaking,  and  far  out  at  sea  they  saw  a 
speck  of  white. 

"  With  Thorir  I  will  deal  later,  for  we 
have  no  proof  against  him  as  yet,"  said  the 
King,  but  that  man  yonder  has  dishonored 
me,  and  shall  die.  Fairhair,  take  what  men 
you  will  from  my  courtmen,  and  the 
'  Crane,'  the  fastest  longship  in  the  har- 
bor. Ketel  has  taken  his  brother's  ship, 
so  you  should  soon  come  up  with  him.  The 
'  Crane '  is  in  the  water,  and  is  well  pro- 
visioned; so  hasten — be  off  within  the 
hour." 

"Thanks,  Olaf !"  replied  Sigurd.  "I 
was  about  to  ask  this  very  thing  of  you.  I 
will  take  my  own  men  and  thirty  of  yours. 
Thanks,  for  all  your  kindness,  and  above 
all  for  your  friendship,  Olaf !" 

The  King  smiled  sadly.  "  I  have  few 
friends,  Sigurd,  and  methinks  you  are  the 
most  faithful  of  them,  though  the  newest. 
No,  go  with  God,  and  forget  him  not,  for 
it  is  still  the  season  of  storms." 

As  Sigurd  turned  away,  the  King 
stopped  him  with  a  sudden  impulse. 

"  Stay !  Give  me  your  hands."  Won- 
dering, Sigurd  put  his  hands  between 
Olaf's.  "  Now  swear  again  your  oath  to 
me,  Jarl  Sigurd !" 

The  boy,  overcome  by  this  unexpected 
title  and  honor,  stumbled  through  the  oath, 
and  rose  with  tears  in  his  eyes. 


"I  need  no  oath  to  be  faithful,  King 
Olaf!  When  you  have  won  Norway,  the 
title  of  friend  is  all  I  want." 

Quick  tears  sprang  to  Olaf's  eyes  also, 
and  unbuckling  his  sword-belt,  he  threw  it 
over  Sigurd's  shoulders,  saying,  "  I  have 
no  earldoms  yet,  but  here  is  my  Jarl-gift, 
my  friend.  Farewell !" 

Sigurd  wrung  the  King's  hand,  then 
turned  and  ran  down  the  stairway  to  the 
courtyard.  Hastily  assembling  his  men, 
and  choosing  thirty  from  Olaf's  followers, 
he  sent  them  down  to  the  "  Crane "  with 
Biorn,  and  followed  them  himself  a  few 
minutes  later,  after  bidding  Ulf  farewell. 
The  captain  would  have  accompanied  him, 
but  Olaf  was  sending  him  on  a  mission  to 
an  Irish  king  in  the  interior. 

The  "  Crane,"  as  Olaf  had  said,  was  well 
stocked  with  all  things  needful  for  a.  voy- 
age ;  so,  weighing  anchor,  the  sail  was  run 
up  and  the  voyage  begun.  As  they  left  the 
harbor,  Sigurd  told  his  men  of  his  advance- 
ment, and  it  was  greeted  with  a  shout  of 
satisfaction ;  for  the  Jomsvikings  were 
proud  of  their  young  leader,  and  the  other 
men  had  heard  many  tales  of  his  bravery. 
Indeed,  even  though  the  title  carried  no 
lands,  it  was  the  ambition  of  every  chief 
of  good  birth  to  be  made  Jarl,  or  Earl,  for 
the  Jarls  were  second  only  to  the  King. 

The  oars  were  run  out,  for  the  wind  was 
light,  and  under  all  speed  the  "  Crane  "  ran 
southward.  Ketil's  ship  was  out  of  sight, 
but  his  goal  was  known,  and  Sigurd  was 
confident  that  he  would  overtake  the  other 
ship  before  night. 

"  Why,  think  you,  is  he  heading  for 
England  instead  of  for  Norway?"  Sigurd 
asked  old  Biorn. 

The  latter  paused  a  moment.  "  Well, 
Jarl  Sigurd,  it  is  in  my  mind  that  Ketil  is 
a  cunning  man.  If  he  took  Astrid  to  Nor- 
way, he  would  make  nothing;  but  by  tak- 
ing her  to  England,  much.  King  Ethelred 
would  pay  high  for  such  a  hostage  from 
King  Svein  of  Denmark." 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


41 


"  Oh,  I  see !  Then  she  will  not  be 
harmed?" 

"Assuredly  not,  Jarl,  at  least  till  she 
reaches  England,  which  I  trust  will  never 
be.  Ethelred  is  as  treacherous  as  Hakon 
himself,  and  if  she  once  falls  into  his 
clutches  it  would  be  a  bad  business." 

They  did  not  come  up  with  Ketil's  ship 
so  soon  as  Sigurd  expected,  for  not  till  mid- 
afternoon  did  the  helmsman  give  a  shout, 
and  Sigurd,  running  to  the  forecastle,  saw 
a  white  speck  far  ahead. 

"  Lower  the  sail,"  he  ordered,  "  and  get 
out  all  the  oars,"  for  until  then  only  half 
the  oars  had  been  going,  to  save  the  men's 
strength.  "  We  cannot  come  up  with  them 
to-day,"  he  explained,  "  so  it  were  best  to 
let  Ketil  think  himself  safe." 

So  the  sail  was  lowered  and  the  "  Crane  " 
proceeded  under  her  oars  till  nightfall, 
when  the  sail  was  hoisted  again  and  the 
oars  taken  in.  The  wind  freshened  toward 
midnight,  when  Sigurd  relinquished  the 
watch  to  Biorn,  and  at  dawn  he  was 
aroused  by  the  old  viking. 

"  Come,  Jarl !  A  squall  from  the  west 
has  broken  on  us,  and  it  is  daybreak." 

Sigurd  followed  him  to  the  deck.  There 
he  found  the  sail  close-reefed,  and  the 
"  Crane  "  running  before  a  squall  of  wind 
and  driving  snow.  There  was  nothing  to 
be  done,  however,  save  to  await  the  sun- 
rise. 

As  full  day  broke,  but  dark  and  gloomy, 
with  flurries  of  snow,  a  shout  went  up,  for 
not  half  a  mile  distant  lay  Ketil's  ship,  also 
running  before  the  wind. 

"  Shake  out  the  reefs,  men  !  We  may  as 
well  take  chances,  and  make  sure  of  her." 

Biorn-  stopped  him,  however,  and  point- 
ing ahead,  showed  Sigurd  a  dull  gray  line. 
"  England,  Jarl,  or  Wales,  rather !  It 
would  be  useless  to  try  to  board  Ketil  in 
this  heavy  sea;  the  ships  would  be  smashed 
to  kindling-wood." 

Sigurd  reluctantly  acknowledged  that  the 
old  viking  was  right,  so  he  contented  him- 


self with  following  the  other  ship,  while 
with  every  hour  the  Welsh  coast  grew 
plainer  ahead  of  them.  The  sky  cleared 
off,  but  the  sea  was  still  running  too  high 
for  any  attempt  at  boarding. 

"  I  know  where  we  are,  Jarl,"  called  out 
the  helmsman.  "  Do  you  remember  that 
great  headland,  Biorn?" 

"  That  I  do,"  exclaimed  the  viking. 
"  See  how  the  coast  falls  away  there, 
Sigurd?  That  is  Wales,  where  live  my 
own  people,  and  we  are  entering  a  great 
firth  which  goes  far  up  into  the  country, 
and  on  the  right  is  the  Saxon  kingdom  of 
Wessex.  I  recall  it  well.  Six  years  ago 
we  sailed  up  and  plundered  a  town  they 
call  Bristol.  It  must  be  that  Ketil  means 
to  land  along  the  Saxon  coast." 

Sigurd  gazed  with  interest  on  the  lofty 
cliffs,  but  soon  they  turned  the  last  head- 
land, and  Ketil  pointed  his  ship  due  east. 
Sigurd  saw  that  they  were  indeed  in  a 
great  firth ;  the  "  Crane "  easily  held  her 
own  with  the  fleeing  ship,  but  did  not 
approach  closer. 

"  If  they  succeed  in  getting  ashore, 
whither  would  they  take  the  Lady  Astrid, 
think  you?"  inquired  Sigurd. 

"  To  King  Ethelred,  doubtless,"  an- 
swered Biorn,  "  at  London,  in  the  east. 
However,  they  cannot  escape  us  now." 

"  Arm  yourselves,  men  !"  ordered  Sigurd, 
a  little  later,  "  the  sea  is  falling  fast,  and 
we  will  run  aboard." 

Ketil,  however,  saw  this  also,  and  evi- 
dently resolved  to  take  no  chances,  for  he 
turned  in  toward  the  coast,  plying  his  oars 
desperately.  The  two  ships,  a  quarter  of 
a  mile  apart,  drew  into  the  coast  and  ran 
along  the  low  shores. 

Suddenly  Biorn  gave  a  cry  of  fury. 
"  He  will  escape  us  yet !"  Ketil's  ship, 
just  beyond  a  headland,  was  turned  in  to- 
ward the  shore.  The  helmsman  turned 
the  "  Crane "  and  the  sail  was  run  down 
as  the  other  ship  disappeared.  Under  all  her 
oars,  the  "  Crane  "  darted  ahead,  and  there 


42 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


before  them  lay  the  ship  of  Ketil,  while  the 
crew  were  leaping  out.  A  band  of  armed 
men  from  the  town  above  ran  down  and 
met  Ketil. 

Sigurd  did  not  wait  to  see  the  meeting, 
but  as  the  "  Crane "  scraped  on  the  sand 
and  ice  he  leaped  overboard,  followed  by 
Biorn,  and  waded  ashore.  Amid  Ketil's 
party  Sigurd  had  seen  the  flutter  of  a  dress, 
and  he  knew  there  was  little  use  searching 
the  other  ship,  so  he  dashed  up  the  hill. 
Suddenly,  however,  a  flight  of  arrows  fell 
among  Sigurd's  men,  and  the  shout  rose  of 
"  Death  to  the  sea-wolves  !" 

Sigurd,  with  Biorn  and  another  man, 
was  far  ahead  of  the  rest,  running  at  top 
speed.  As  the  sudden  attack  was  made,  a 
number  of  Saxons  sprang  out  from  am- 
bush and  surrounded  the  three. 


CHAPTER  XI. 
AT  ETHELRED'S  COURT. 

SIGURD  flung  his  hand  up  and 
sheathed  his  sword.  The  Saxons 
paused,  and  one  of  their  number 
stepped  forward. 

"You  will  get  little  plunder  here,  vikings, 
and  many  hard  knocks,"  he  called,  "so  you 
had  best  put  to  sea  again." 

"  We  are  no  vikings  or  sea-wolves,"  an- 
swered Sigurd.  "  I  am  Jarl  Sigurd  Buis- 
son,  one  of  King  Olaf's  men  from  Dublin, 
and  am  in  pursuit  of  these  men  who  fled  up 
to  the  town.  Two  days  since  they  abducted 
a  noble  lady  from  Olaf's  own  castle,  whom 
I  seek  to  rescue." 

The  Saxon  leader  gave  an  exclamation 
of  astonishment,  and  at  this  moment 
Sigurd's  men  ran  up  and  joined  him.  The 
Saxon  bows  were  raised,  but  the  leader 
checked  them. 

"  You  look  over-young  to  be  a  Jarl,"  he 
declared,  "  but  if  your  story  is  true  we  have 
indeed  done  ill.  The  leader  of  those  men 


said  he  was  pursued  by  sea-robbers,  and 
that  he  was  on  his  way  to  King  Ethelred ; 
so,  although  he  was  a  Northman,  we  gave 
him  safe  conduct.  What  proof  have  you 
of  your  tale?" 

Sigurd,  who  was  in  despair  at  this  un- 
expected check,  knew  that  it  was  necessary 
to  win  the  Saxon  over.  "  Does  my  ship 
look  like  a  viking  dragon?"  he  said  calmly. 
"  Were  we  vikings,  we  would  not  be  abroad 
this  time  of  year.  See,  I  wear  the  Cross, 
and  my  men  are  from  Olaf's  courtmen,  as 
you  may  see  from  their  shields  and  weap- 
ons. We  are  Christians  all,  and  no  follow- 
ers of  Thor." 

At  this  the  Saxon  stepped  up  and  shook 
his  hand  heartily.  "  Your  pardon,  Jarl,  but 
I  am  warden  of  the  coast,  and  must  do  my 
utmost  to  defend  it  from  sea-rovers.  I  am 
Jarl  Edmund,  and  now  I  recall  that  in  the 
other  party  was  a  woman,  or  rather  girl." 

"  She  is  a  noble  lady  of  Denmark,"  said 
Sigurd,  not  thinking  it  wise  to  tell  Astrid's 
real  position.  "  Now,  cannot  we  follow 
these  men  to  the  town?" 

Jarl  Edmund  turned.  "  Of  course,  but 
they  told  us  they  were  on  the  King's  busi- 
ness, and  I  sent  a  man  with  them  to  get 
them  horses  at  once.  I  am  indeed  sorry 
for  this,  Jarl." 

"  You  but  did  your  duty,"  replied  Sigurd, 
"  and  there  is  no  help  for  it."  He  looked 
at  Biorn :  "  What  is  your  counsel,  old 
friend?" 

"  Ketil  will  push  forward  to  London," 
replied  Biorn,  "  so  I  think  you  had  best  fol- 
low him  with  the  Jomsborg  men,  and  try  to 
catch  him.  I  will  take  the  others  and  the 
'  Crane,'  and  proceed  by  sea  to  London." 

"  Good !"  Sigurd  turned  to  Edmund 
again.  "  I  suppose  we  can  procure  horses 
in  the  town  yonder?" 

"  Yes,"  replied  the  Saxon,  eager  to  repair 
his  mistake,  "  I  will  myself  go  with  you." 

Sigurd  picked  out  his  old  Jomsborg  men, 
and  saying  farewell  to  Biorn,  made  all 
haste  to  reach  the  town.  As  they  entered, 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


43 


Edmund  dispatched  several  men,  one  of 
whom  returned  with  the  news  that  Ketil's 
party  had  left  ten  minutes  before.  At  this 
Edmund  made  a  gesture  of  dismay. 

"  I  fear  you  will  not  come  up  with  them, 
Jarl  Sigurd,  for  they  took  the  best  horses 
to  be  found.  However,  we  will  see  what 
we  can  do." 

In  half  an  hour  Sigurd  and  his  men  were 
riding  east,  Edmund  having  furnished 
them  with  a  guide.  They  pushed  on  for 
many  days,  but  found  that  Ketil  kept  well 
ahead,  commandeering  the  best  horses  as 
he  went,  on  the  plea  of  the  King's  business. 
At  Malmesbury  and  Wantage,  Sigurd  and 
his  men  were  surprised  at  the  size  of  the 
cities  and  the  splendid  civilization  they 
found  there,  which  was  far  ahead  of  any 
that  the  north  could  boast  of.  Wessex  and 
Sussex  had  not  been  ravaged  by  the  Danes 
for  many  years,  and  the  country  amazed 
them  by  its  beauty  and  fertility. 

"  If  these  Saxons  had  kings  like  ours," 
remarked  Sigurd  to  his  men,  "  King  Svein 
would  have  a  hard  time  indeed  before  he 
could  take  the  throne  of  England." 

At  Reading  they  found  that  Ketil  was 
only  half  a  day  ahead  of  them  so  they 
pushed  on  to  London  with  all  speed,  reach- 
ing it  in  the  evening.  Next  morning 
Sigurd  took  his  way  to  the  palace. 

Here  he  gave  his  name  and  title  to  the 
chamberlain,  and  was  shown  into  the 
great  hall,  around  which  ran  a  buzz  of 
astonishment  as  he  appeared.  Sigurd  had 
filled  out  amazingly  in  the  last  few  months, 
and  was  large  for  his  age;  he  wore  his 
golden  helm,  a  blue  cloth  kirtle  and  waist, 
and  the  great  sword  that  Olaf  had  given 
him,  its  hilt  wound  with  gold  and  the  scab- 
bard thick  with  carved  ivory.  As  he 
walked  up  the  hall,  he  removed  his  helm 
and  let  his  long  golden  hair  stream  over 
his  shoulders. 

The  chamberlain  led  him  to  the  high- 
seat,  and  Sigurd  knelt  a  moment  before 
King  Ethelred,  then  rose.  The  king  was  a 


pale,  crafty-looking  man,  and  as  Sigurd 
looked  around  his  heart  sank  for  an  instant, 
for  among  the  courtiers  he  beheld  the 
mocking  face  of  Ketil. 

After  the  chamberlain  announced  his 
name  and  title,  the  King  arose.  "  Greet- 
ing, Jarl  Sigurd!  The  men  of  King  Olaf 
are  ever  welcome  at  our  court,  and  we  look 
forward  to  another  visit  from  himself. 
Well  I  remember  Olaf,  who  spent  a  year  or 
two  with  us,  and  I  would  fain  see  him 
again.  You  look  young  to  hold  a  Jarlship 
under  so  great  a  man  !" 

Sigurd  answered  fittingly,  then  said, 
"  My  lord  King,  I  ask  your  aid.  Among 
your  men  I  see  a  certain  Norseman,  Ketil 
Gormson,  who  not  long  since  abducted  a 
lady  from  the  castle  of  King  Olaf.  I  have 
followed  him  closely,  and  since  he  is  here, 
the  Lady  Astrid  is  not  far  away." 

King  Ethelred  looked  surprised.  .  "  Why, 
what  is  this?  The  man  Ketil  is  a  peaceful 
trader,  and  arrived  here  only  yesterday. 
He  has  told  me  nothing  of  any  lady !" 

"Nevertheless,"  replied  Sigurd  firmly, 
"  she  is  with  him,  and  King  Olaf  sent  me 
to  rescue  her.  I  must  crave  your  help, 
King  Ethelred." 

The  king  ordered  Ketil  to  stand  forth, 
which  he  did,  a  sly  smile  upon  his  face. 
Ethelred  asked  him  what  he  knew  of 
Sigurd's  tale. 

"  Nothing,  my  lord ;  I  have  no  woman 
with  me,  and  have  but  just  arrived  by  slow 
stages  from  the  west  coast  where  I  was 
trading." 

Ethelred  looked  at  Sigurd,  and  then  the 
latter  knew  that  he  was  being  made  a  mock 
of.  No  doubt  the  king:  had  Astrid  hid  away, 
intending  to  hold  her  for  a  hostage. 

"  You  see,  Jarl  Sigurd,"  said  the  king 
softly,  "  you  must  have  been  mistaken  in 
this  man,  who  is  a  kind-hearted  fellow  in- 
deed. Anything  that  I  can  do  to  aid  you 
will  be  done  at  once.  Bring  your  men  to 
the  palace,  and  you  shall  be  given  quarters 
here." 


44 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


At  these  words,  and  Ketil's  mocking 
smile,  Sigurd  lost  his  temper.  Taking  a 
step  forward,  he  cried  angrily:  "There  is 
no  mistake,  King  Ethelred,  and  well  you 
know  it!  Think  not  that  you  will  escape 
the  heavy  hand  of  Olaf  by  smooth  words, 
when  he  hears  of  this.  As  for  you,  Ketil," 
Sigurd  turned  on  the  man,  who  shrank 
back  at  his  blazing  eyes,  "  take  heed  to 
yourself!  If  I  meet  you  outside  the  palace 
I  will  slay  you  like  the  dog  you  are!" 

"  You  forget  yourself,  Jarl  Sigurd," 
spoke  out  the  king,  sternly.  "  I  have 
promised  you  assistance  in  this  matter,  so 
bring  your  men  to  the  palace  at  once,  and 
we  will  have  search  made  for  the  lady." 

Sigurd  rejoined  his  men  with  dismay  in 
his  heart.  He  knew  only  too  well  that  the 
King's  command  meant  that  he  would  be 
watched  closely,  and  he  saw  no  way  of 
rescuing  Astrid.  When  he  told  the  men 
the  result  of  his  visit  to  court,  they  were 
as  angry  as  he;  but  there  was  no  help  for 
it,  and  in  the  afternoon  they  took  up  their 
quarters  in  the  palace. 

Ketil  took  good  care  to  keep  out  of 
Sigurd's  way.  The  Jomsvikings  wandered 
freely  about  the  city,  staring  wonderingly 
in  the  shops,  and  Sigurd  bade  them  keep  a 
sharp  lookout  for  Astrid.  The  days  passed 
away,  and  Ethelred  tried  to  soothe  his  visi- 
tors by  a  p-etended  search  of  the  city,  and 
by  soft  words,  but  at  last  Sigurd  determined 
to  take  matters  into  his  own  hands.  It 
was  now  the  middle  of  February,  and 
Sigurd  was  impatient  to  return  to  King 
Olaf. 

Calling  his  men  together  after  the  even- 
ing meal,  he  said,  "  Men,  if  we  are  to  find 
Lady  Astrid  we  must  do  it  ourselves.  I  be- 
lieve she  is  held  here  in  the  palace,  in  the 
woman's  wing;  do  you  therefore  hang 
about  that  side,  pretending  to  look  in  the 
shops.  I  myself  will  do  the  same,  and  may- 
hap the  Lady  Astrid  will  either  see  us,  or 
we  will  light  on  some  clue." 

Sigurd  was  treated  with  great  honor,  but 


when  he  went  abroad  he  knew  that  he  was 
spied  upon  closely.  The  next  day  he 
visited  the  shops  near  the  women's  quar- 
ters of  the  palace,  and  as  he  sauntered 
along  one  of  his  men  strolled  up. 

"  Come  with  me,  Jarl,"  he  whispered. 
Sigurd  accompanied  him,  talking  and 
laughing,  and  the  man  said.  "  Look  at  the 
third  window  from  the  end." 

Sigurd  did  so,  and  his  heart  gave  a  leap 
of  joy.  There,  hanging  from  a  corner  of 
the  window,  was  a  scrap  of  blue  and  gold 
cloth  that  he  knew  had  been  taken  from 
Astrid's  scarf.  As  he  looked  up,  a  face 
appeared,  but  at  a  quick  sign  of  warning 
from  him,  it  vanished. 

"  Hurrah !"  he  cried,  when  he  had  re- 
gained his  room,  "  we  have  found  her, 
sure  enough !  And  now  to  rescue  her." 

That  same  evening  he  heard  a  wild 
shout  go  up  from  his  men,  in  the  next 
room,  and  a  moment  later  Biorn  strode 
into  his  room.  Sigurd  greeted  him  with 
unbounded  joy,  then  seeing  Biorn's  face 
half  covered  with  bandages,  cried : 

"What  is  this?    Wounded,  Biorn?" 

The  old  viking  smiled.  "  We  met  a 
Danish  ship  four  days  ago,  Jarl,  and  she 
stopped  to  talk  with  us." 

"Up  to  your  old  tricks,  sea-wolf!" 
laughed  Sigurd.  "  What  did  you  talk 
about  ?" 

"  The  price  of  swords,  mainly,"  answered 
Skarde.  "  The  Danes  finally  decided 
that  ours  were  better,  so  we  gave  them 
Ketil's  old  trading  ship  and  brought  in  the 
Dane  with  us;  she  is  brand  new,  and  as  fast 
as  the  '  Crane.'  It  was  hard  work,  though, 
for  I  had  only  thirty  men,  and  they  were 
double  that.  We  lost  ten  killed,  and  half 
of  us  are  wounded ;  but  that  is  no  matter. 
Now  for  your  story." 

Sigurd  quickly  outlined  the  position  of 
himself  and  Astrid.  When  he  concluded, 
Biorn  was  silent  for  some  time. 

"  It  is  no  light  matter,  Sigurd,  to  brave 
Ethelred;  but  I  think  we  had  best  carry  off 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


45 


"As  for  vott.  KetiL   take  heed   to  vourseJf!" 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


47 


the  Lady  Astrid.  Once  aboard  the 
'  Crane,'  we  would  be  safe.  But  how  to 
do  the  business?" 

"  By  craft  only,  Biorn.  Astrid  saw  me 
to-day,  and  knows  we  are  here.  How  to 
get  a  message  to  her?" 

"  That  is  easy  enough.  Do  you  write  it, 
and  I  will  shoot  an  arrow  into  her  window 
to-night." 

"  Good !  I  never  thought  of  that." 
Sigurd  procured  a  bit  of  parchment,  and  in 
a  few  minutes  the  message  was  ready.  "  I 
told  her  that  to-morrow  night  we  would 
wait  beneath  her  window.  She  must  con- 
trive to  let  herself  down,  and  if  necessary 
we  will  fight  our  way  down  to  the  '  Crane.' 
Is  she  below  the  bridge  or  above  it?" 

"  Below.  I  will  go  down  to-morrow  and 
bid  the  men  be  ready  to  receive  us.  We 
must  get  some  fresh  water  on  board,  too." 

An  hour  later  Biorn  returned.  "  The 
arrow  flew  straight,  Jarl.  I  waited  a  few 
minutes  and  saw  a  light  cross  her  shutter 
thrice." 

Sigurd  nodded.  "  Then  she  understands. 
Get  the  '  Crane  '  ready  to-morrow,  and  re- 
turn by  nightfall.  Better  have  a  boat  or 
two  at  the  water-stairs,  just  at  the  end  of 
this  street." 

"  Trust  me,  Jarl,"  said  the  old  viking, 
and  returned  to  the  ship. 


CHAPTER  XII. 
THE  FLIGHT  FROM  LONDON. 

THE  return  of  Biorn  and  the  finding  of 
Astrid  happened  so  close  together 
that  Sigurd  determined  to  take  ad- 
vantage of  his  opportunity.  He  saw  the 
King  twice  a  day,  at  meals,  and  on  each 
occasion  Ethelred  seated  him  near  the  high- 
seat  and  conversed  affably  with  him;  but 
Sigurd  felt  that  the  iron  hand  was  but  con- 
cealed within  a  silken  glove,  and  that  the 
King  would  soon  find  means  to  rid  himself 
of  this  troublesome  Northman. 


The  day  after  Biorn's  arrival,  at  the 
noonday  meal,  Ethelred  called  Sigurd  to  his 
side  as  usual. 

"  How  is  the  search  progressing,  Jarl  ? 
Have  you  any  news  yet?" 

Sigurd  assumed  a  gloomy  air.  "  I  only 
wish  I  had  some,  King  Ethelred.  My  ship 
arrived  last  night,  and  I  cannot  long  delay 
my  return  to  King  Olaf,  I  fear." 

The  King  seemed  unmistakably  relieved, 
and  Sigurd  judged  that  his  visit  to  the 
shops  the  day  before  had  not  escaped  the 
spies.  Ketil  he  had  not  seen  since  that 
first  day,  but  as  he  always  saw  some  of  his 
men  whenever  he  left  the  palace,  he  be- 
lieved the  Norseman  was  keeping  close 
watch  on  him. 

That  evening  Biorn  entered  his  room 
shortly  after  dark  with  a  coil  of  thin  but 
strong  rope  and  a  light  grapnel. 

"  Is  the  '  Crane  '  in  shape?"  asked  Sigurd 
eagerly.  "  We  had  best  wait  an  hour  or 
two  to  let  the  streets  get  deserted." 

"  Yes,  all  is  ready,  and  two  large  boats 
are  waiting  at  the  stairs.  We  are  only 
three  streets  from  the  river,  so  the  escape 
is  open." 

"  I'm  not  so  sure  about  that,"  replied 
Sigurd  uneasily.  "  If  Ketil  discovers 
those  boats  there,  and  has  been  following 
you,  as  is  likely,  we  may  have  trouble  yet. 
However,  time  enough  for  that  when  it 
comes." 

An  hour  later  there  were  few  people  in 
the  streets,  so  Sigurd  roused  his  men  and 
set  out. 

"  We  had  better  not  keep  together,"  he 
said.  "  Three  of  you,  with  Biorn,  come 
with  me ;  the  others  wait  at  the  corner  here. 
We  will  not  be  long." 

So  the  four  quickly  made  their  way  to  the 
corner  of  the  palace  where  Astrid's  win- 
dow was  located.  A  high  wall  enclosed 
the  palace,  with  a  strip  of  garden  inside; 
the  palace  itself  had  but  two  stories,  Astrid 
being  on  the  upper. 

As  they  reached  the  wall,   Biorn  flung 


48 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


up  the  grapnel,  which  held,  and  Sigurd 
went  up  the  rope,  hand  over  hand.  Chang- 
ing the  rope  to  the  inside,  he  slid  down, 
and  stood  beneath  the  window. 

All  was  dark  above,  but  when  he  threw 
up  a  stone  at  the  shutter,  it  opened  and 
something  tumbled  out.  Catching  it, 
Sigurd  saw  it  was  a  rope  made  of  shreds  of 
curtains ;  he  held  it  firm,  and  a  minute  later 
Astrid  slid  down  and  stood  by  his  side. 

Sigurd  greeted  her  with  a  silent  hand- 
clasp, and  led  her  to  the  wall.  Climbing 
up,  he  drew  Astrid  to  the  top,  and  next 
minute  both  stood  in  the  street.  Old  Biorn 
greeted  Astrid  heartily,  and  threw  a  dark 
cloak  over  her  dress ;  and  without  delay 
they  started  for  the  river. 

When  they  met  the  dozen  men  left  by 
Sigurd,  he  sent  them  forward  with  Biorn 
to  get  the  boats  ready,  following  with 
Astrid.  Ten  minutes  later  they  descended 
the  stairs  and  pushed  off,  Astrid  and  Sigurd 
standing  in  the  prow  of  the  first  boat. 

"  Hurrah  !  You  are  free  at  last,  Astrid  !" 
cried  Sigurd,  in  a  low  tone.  At  the  same 
instant  the  girl  pulled  him  sharply  back- 
ward, and  a  spear  whizzed  under  his  arm. 
A  yell  arose,  and  a  dark  mass  in  front  of 
them  resolved  itself  into  a  large  boat  full 
of  men. 

Sigurd  threw  all  concealment  aside. 
"  Pull,  men,  pull !"  he  shouted.  One  of  the 
men  sank  back  with  a  spear  through  him, 
and  with  that  the  other  boat  crashed  into 
Sigurd's. 

Standing  in  the  prow,  Sigurd  cut  with 
his  sword  at  the  foremost  man,  while  Biorn 
endeavored  to  ward  off  the  other  craft. 
Then  Ketil's  mocking  laugh  sounded  in 
Sigurd's  ears,  and  as  his  blow  fell  harmless- 
ly on  the  other's  shield,  a  boat-hook  caught 
his  byrnie  and  all  but  jerked  him  over- 
board. 

"  You  have  tough  bark,  friend  Sigurd," 
cried  Ketil,  as  the  boy  staggered.  Sigurd 
tried  in  vain  to  free  himself  from  the  hook, 
as  Ketil  pulled,  so  he  cried: 


•  "  Take  Astrid  on  board  and  set  sail, 
Biorn  !" 

Instead  of  resisting  the  boat-hook, 
Sigurd  gave  a  leap  forward  into  the  prow 
of  Ketil's  boat.  As  he  did  so,  Biorn  pulled 
away,  with  a  cry  of  dismay  from  Astrid, 
and  left  Sigurd  amid  his  foes. 

When  the  boy  sprang  on  board,  Ketil  was 
pushed  back,  and  he  staggered.  Sigurd  cut 
him  down  with  a  single  blow,  disengaged 
the  hook  from  his  steel  shirt,  and  looked 
around.  He  had  forgotten  the  second  boat, 
and  this  was  right  alongside.  Striking 
down  a  second  man,  Sigurd  leaped  back 
among  his  own  followers. 

"  To  the  '  Crane,'  men  !     Follow  Biorn  !" 

The  men  needed  no  urging,  and  they 
soon  caught  up  with  the  first  boat.  Looking 
back,  Sigurd  saw  that  they  were  not  pur- 
sued, for  the  others  were  demoralized  at 
the  loss  of  their  leader. 

"All  safe,  Sigurd?"  cried  Biorn,  as  they 
came  up. 

"  All  safe,"  the  boy  replied,  "  and  I  think 
I  have  paid  Ketil  for  his  villainy.  At  any 
rate  he  won't  bother  us  for  some  time. 
Row  fast,  men,  there  is  no  use  trying  to 
hide  now." 

Shouts  rose  on  the  air  behind  them,  and 
they  saw  torches  darting  to  and  fro.  Soon 
they  passed  below  London  Bridge,  and  in 
a  few  minutes  were  aboard  the  "  Crane," 
the  men  on  board  sending  up  a  hearty 
cheer. 

Sigurd  led  Astrid  to  the  cabin,  while 
Biorn  took  charge  of  the  ship,  whose  oars 
were  already  out.  "  Now,  Astrid,  tell  me 
your  story,"  said  Sigurd,  as  they  sat  down. 

"  Well,  about  midnight  that  night,  Ketil 
came  to  my  room  with  a  note  in  Runic  say- 
ing that  you  were  wounded  and  to  come  at 
once.  I  thought  it  strange  that  you  should 
send  him,  but  went  willingly  enough. 

"  As  soon  as  we  were  outside  the  palace 
his  men  seized  me  and  carried  me  on  the 
ship.  There  I  was  freed,  but  locked  in  the 
cabin.  I  scratched  a  few  words  on  a  piece 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


49 


of  wood,  for  I  heard  Ketil  say  they  were 
going  to  England,  and  then  heard  you  come 
up  alongside.  I  threw  the  wood  out  of  the 
window,  and  called,  but  Ketil  ran  in  and 
threw  a  cloak  over  my  head." 

After  that  I  was  treated  well  enough. 
After  we  landed,  Ketil  made  me  promise 
not  to  escape  if  he  left  me  free;  and  when 
we  got  to  London  King  Ethelred  was  very 
nice  to  me,  giving  me  women  to  wait  on  me, 
and  many  gifts." 

"  The  villain !"  cried  Sigurd  angrily,  and 
he  told  Astrid  all  the  king  had  said. 

"  I  was  kept  in  my  room,"  continued 
Astrid,  "  but  I  had  nothing  to  complain  of. 
Then  one  day  I  saw  you  in  the  shops  across 
the  way,  and  you  know  the  rest.  I  tore  up 
some  curtains  to  make  a  rope  with,  and  here 
I  am." 

Sigurd  laughed.  "  Well,  shall  we  stay 
here,  or  go  out  on  deck?" 

"  Out  on  deck,  by  all  means.  But  why 
do  your  men  call  you  Jarl  ?" 

Sigurd  told  her  of  his  last  interview  with 
Olaf,  and  Astrid  said,  casting  down  her. 
eyes :  "  Well,  I  suppose  after  this  you  will 
hold  me  so  far  below  you  that — " 

"  Nonsense,"  broke  in  Sigurd,  laughing, 
"get  on  deck  and  stop  this  foolery !" 

Astrid  gayly  ran  out  on  deck,  and  Sigurd 
followed.  They  were  speeding  swiftly 
down  the  Thames,  which  is  seldom  frozen 
in  winter,  and  all  sound  of  pursuit  was  lost. 
As  there  was  nothing  to  be  seen  in  the  faint 
starlight^  Astrid  went  to  bed,  Sigurd  giv- 
ing the  cabin  up  to  her,  while  he  took 
charge  of  the  ship,  Biorn  relieving  him 
after  a  few  hours. 

At  sunrise  they  were  well  at  sea,  and  as 
there  were  plenty  of  furs  on  board,  the 
men  were  warmly  clad.  Suddenly  Sigurd, 
looking  back,  cried  out: 

"  Look  there,  Biorn  !     What  ship  is  that  ?" 

The  old  viking  gave  a  grim  laugh,  and 
then  Sigurd  recollected  the  ship  which 
Biorn  had  taken  on  his  way  to  London. 

"  She  had  only  fifteen  men  in  her,  Jarl, 


for  I  could  spare  no  more  from  the 
'  Crane ' ;  but  yesterday  I  picked  up  a  score 
of  Norsemen  in  London,  and  as  they  were 
willing  to  take  service  with  Olaf,  they  are 
now  on  board.  She  may  come  in  handy." 

"  Yes,  indeed,"  agreed  Sigurd,  "  and  she 
is  a  handsome  ship,  too.  Where  did  you 
get  the  men,  Biorn?" 

"  Oh !"  replied  the  other,  carelessly, 
"  they  were  prisoners  of  Ethelred's,  so  I 
invited  them  to  take  a  cruise.  They  were 
not  closely  watched,  so  there  they  are !" 

"  What  have  you  done !"  broke  out 
Sigurd,  in  dismay.  "  Don't  you  know  that 
this  will  bring  all  the  Saxon  forces  down 
onus?" 

Biorn  shrugged  his  shoulders.  "  There 
were  only  two  of  Ethelred's  longships  lying 
in  the  water,  Jarl,  and  seeing  that  they  lay 
unwatched,  some,  of  the:  men  rowed  over 
last  night  and  all  but  hewed  away  their 
masts." 

Sigurd  seized  the  old  viking's  hand. 
"  Pardon,  Biorn,  I  might  have  known  you 
better.  That  explains  why  we  were  not 
followed;  now  what  shall  we  do?" 

"  Well,  it  is  madness  to  put  to  sea  in  this 
weather,  but  there  is  no  help  for  it.  I 
would  suggest  that  we  either  go  north  to 
Mercia  or  Northumberland  and  winter 
there,  or  else  strike  over  to  Flanders  and 
go  overland  to  Denmark.  We  would  be 
safe  enough  in  the  north  of  England,  for 
there  are  many  vikings  there  and  Ethelred's 
power  is  weak,  to  say  the  least." 

"  Then  let  us  head  for  there,  gather  a 
few  more  men  if  possible,  and  strike  for. 
Denmark  or  else  Flanders." 

This  was  decided  on  finally,  for  Sigurd 
wished  to  take  the  captured  ship  with  him, 
but  his  men  were  too  few  to  manage  both 
vessels  in  case  of  danger.  So  they  coasted 
along  the  shore  of  East  Anglia,  then  turned 
north,  past  the  Wash,  and  came  to  the 
Humber  River.  They  met  with  no  storms 
on  the  way,  though  the  weather  was  cold 
enough.  ,  .  . 


50 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


Just  before  reaching  the  Humber,  the 
"  Crane  "  stopped  at  a  small  river  for  fresh 
water.  There  were  no  habitations  in  sight, 
so  Sigurd  and  Astrid  went  ashore  while 
the  casks  were  being  filled. 

"  It  is  good  to  be  on  land  again,  Sigurd  !" 
cried  Astrid,  after  racing  and  beating  him 
to  the  top  of  a  small  hill. 

"  I've  been  at  sea  so  long  that  I  don't 
notice  it  much,"  laughed  Sigurd  spreading 
his  fur  cloak  in  the  snow  for  Astrid  to  sit 
on. 

As  they  rested,  looking  over  the  broad 
expanse  of  snow,  dotted  with  trees  and 
forests  that  spread  inland,  they  heard  the 
ringing  call  of  a  war-horn  from  the  ships. 

"  Come  on,  Astrid !"  cried  Sigurd,  start- 
ing up,  "  something  must  be  wrong  at  the 
ships !" 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

ALFRED  OF  MERCIA. 

THEY  dashed  down  the  hill,  and  in  a 
few  minutes  were  through  the  trees 
and  on  the  river  bank.  They  found 
Biorn  drawing  up  his  men. 

"Why,  what's  the  matter,  Biorn?" 

"  I  am  not  sure,  Jarl,  but  look  up  the  ice 
yonder." 

He  pointed  up  the  frozen  bed  of  the  lit- 
tle river,  and  Sigurd  saw  a  large  party  of 
armed  men,  pulling  a  sledge,  running  to- 
ward them.  Sigurd  examined  them  for  a 
minute. 

"  I  don't  think  they  mean  to  attack  us, 
Biorn,  or  they  would  not  have  that  sledge. 
They  look  like  Saxons,  so  best  be  ready." 

By  this  time  more  men  had  arrived 
from  the  ships,  and  as  the  Saxons  ap- 
proached, Sigurd  saw  that  there  were  some 
fifty  men  in  the  party.  Finding  the  North- 
men waiting,  they  stopped  running,  and  one, 
better  dressed  than  the  rest,  in  a  bearskin 
mantle  and  helmet,  hastened  on. 


As  he  came  near,  Astrid  said,  "  Why, 
Sigurd,  he  isn't  any  older  than  you  are  f 
And  you  were  afraid  of  him !" 

Sigurd  made  no  reply  save  a  smile,  for, 
indeed,  the  Saxon  was  only  a  youth,  but  a 
noble-looking  one.  Nearly  as  tall  as  Sigurd, 
he  was  not  so  broad,  but  his  face  was  frank, 
and  attracted  the  young  Jarl  at  once. 

"  Are  you  Danes  or  Norsemen  ?"  called 
the  stranger. 

"  Norsemen,"  answered  Sigurd,  "  and 
you  are  Saxons,  I  take  it." 

"  Right  you  are,"  laughed  the  boy,  with 
a  glance  over  his  shoulder.  "  Are  you 
plundering  the  country?" 

"  Nay,"  answered  Sigurd.  "  We  are 
Christians.  Bid  your  men  stand  back,  for 
our  arrows  lie  loosely  on  the  strings." 

The  boy  laughed  again,  as  if  it  were  a 
good  joke,  and  turning,  waved  to  his  men, 
who  halted. 

"  Let  me  explain,"  he  said.  "  I  am  Al- 
fred, son  of  Jarl  Alfric  of  Mercia,  and  with 
me  is  Sigrid  my  sister.  Briefly,  we  are 
flying  from  the  men  of  King  Ethelred;  will 
you  assist  us?" 

Sigurd,  suspecting  a  trap,  looked  keenly 
at  the  boy;  but  his  gaze  was  met  squarely, 
and  Sigurd's  suspicions  vanished.  "  Where 
is  your  sister,  and  your  pursuers  ?"  he  asked. 

Alfred  pointed  to  the  sledge.  "  My  sister 
is  ill,  and  we  have  to  carry  her."  His  face 
suddenly  became  serious.  "  Hasten  your 
reply,  sir  Norseman,  for  God's  sake !  The 
King's  men  are  not  half  a  mile  behind,  and 
there  are  nigh  three  score  of  them,  while 
half  of  mine  are  wounded  or  sick." 

Sigurd  stepped  out  and  gripped  his  hand. 
"  No  time  for  talking,  then !  Take  your 
sister  and  the  sick  or  wounded  men  out  to 
my  ships,  and  let  all  your  fighting  men  join 
mine.  Take  charge  of  him,  Astrid,  and 
use  the  boats  quickly." 

The  boy  called  up  his  men,  dividing  them 
as  Sigurd  had  ordered,  and  joining  the 
Norsemen  with  twenty  Saxons. 

"  We  will  give  Ethelred's  men  a  sharp 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


51 


lesson,  Biorn.  Do  you  post  the  men  as  you 
see  fit." 

A  hundred  yards  up  the  river  was  a  bend, 
and  running  toward  this,  Biorn  motioned 
the  men  to  hide  behind  the  dry  bushes  that 
stood  along  the  banks,  while  he  ran  forward 
to  reconnoiter.  A  minute  later  he  returned 
at  full  speed. 

"  Here  they  are,"  he  cried.  "  Pass  the 
word  to  wait  till  they  come  opposite,  then 
loose  arrows  and  at  them  with  axes." 

Barely  had  Biorn  sunk  out  of  sight  when 
the  pursuing  party  appeared,  three-score 
Saxons  under  two  leaders.  "  Pick  off  the 
leaders,  men,"  whispered  Sigurd,  and  as 
the  party  came  between  the  two  bands  of 
Norsemen,  Biorn's  horn  sounded,  and  a 
cloud  of  arrows  poured  into  the  compact 
body  of  Saxons.  At  the  same  time  the  vik- 
ings seized  their  swords  and  axes  and  ran 
forward. 

The  Saxons  resisted  bravely,  but  their 
leaders  had  fallen  at  the  first  fire,  and  after 
a  minute  of  sharp  hand-to-hand  fighting 
they  broke  and  fled. 

Sigurd  had  headed  his  men,  engaging  a 
tall  Saxon  in  single  combat.  The  other 
wounded  Sigurd  badly  in  the  shoulder  at 
the  first  exchange  of  blows;  and,  dropping 
his  shield,  Sigurd  grasped  his  great  sword 
in  both  hands  and  rushed  his  foe.  At  the 
first  blow  the  other's  shield-arm  fell,  numb 
with  the  shock ;  at  the  second  his  sword  flew 
from  his  hand  and  he  slipped  on  the  ice, 
falling  heavily. 

Seeing  that  the  enemy  had  broken,  Sigurd 
paused  and  shouted: 

"  Back,  men,  back !  We  only  want  to 
give  them  a  lesson,  not  to  slaughter  them !" 

His  own  men  obeyed,  but  Alfred's  Sax- 
ons drove  on  after  the  fugitives,  and 
Sigurd  could  hardly  blame  them.  Then  he 
turned  to  his  foe;  the  man  lay  looking  up, 
awaiting  the  death  stroke. 

"  Get  up,"  exclaimed  Sigurd  with  a 
laugh,  "  I  am  no  murderer !" 

With  an  amazed  expression,  the  Saxon 


slowly  got  up,  and  then,  seizing  Sigurd's 
hand  in  his,  knelt  and  kissed  it.  "  Thanks, 
lord,"  he  said,.  "  you  are  the  first  who  ever 
bested  Wulf  at  the  sword,  and  if  you  will 
take  him,  he  will  serve  you  right  well!" 

Sigurd  smiled,  but  faintly;  and  Biorn 
was  just  in  time  to  catch  him  in  his  arms. 
The  wounded  shoulder  was  streaming 
with  blood,  and  he  had  suddenly  turned 
faint. 

While  Biorn  held  him  and  the  other  men 
crowded  around,  Wulf  tore  off  his  woolen 
tunic  and  deftly  bound  up  the  wound, 
Biorn  watching  him  suspiciously;  then, 
taking  Sigurd's  feet  while  Biorn  tenderly 
held  his  body,  the  two  carried  him  back 
to  the  shore. 

As  they  approached,  Astrid  ran  up. 

"Sigurd!     Is  Sigurd  hurt?" 

"  It  is  nothing,"  replied  Biorn,  "  only  a 
wound  in  the  shoulder.  He'll  be  all  right 
in  ten  minutes." 

Wulf,  who  had  wounded  the  boy,  now 
surprised  Biorn  by  his  tenderness.  Setting 
the  boy  with  his  back  to  an  ice-hummock, 
he  bathed  his  face  with  snow,  and  Sigurd 
opened  his  eyes. 

"  Keep  quiet,"  growled  Biorn,  as  he 
struggled  to  rise,  "  I  will  attend  to  the  em- 
barking, and  you  can  rest  for  a  space." 

By  the  time  the  water  casks  were  aboard 
Alfred  and  the  Saxons  had  returned,  and 
the  Saxon  boy  seemed  genuinely  sorry  for 
his  rescuer's  mishap.  All  then  embarked, 
and  Biorn  divided  the  men  between  the 
two  ships. 

On  the  "  Crane "  he  took  the  Jotns- 
vikings,  Olaf's  courtmen,  and  a  dozen 
Saxons;  the  Norse  prisoners  and  thirty 
Saxons  went  on  board  the  other  ship.  In 
an  hour  the  sails  were  hoisted,  and  the 
ships  bore  away  from  the  land,  heading 
east. 

Sigurd  sat  on  the  forecastle  of  the 
"Crane,"  Astrid  and  the  two  Saxons  near 
him.  "  Now  tell  me  your  story,"  said 
Sigurd,  giving  his  own  name  and  Astrid's. 


52 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


"  Our  father  was  the  Jarl  of  Mercia," 
began  Alfred,  "  but  King  Ethelred  has  al- 
ways been  jealous  of  his  popularity,  and 
has  persecuted  him  unceasingly.  Three 
weeks  since  a  party  of  armed  men  appeared 
to  seize  our  father,  but  he  fled  to  a  Danish 
ship  on  the  coast,  and  she  took  him  off. 
My  elder  brother  Alfgar  was  taken  and 
blinded." 

Astrid  and  Sigurd  gave  a  cry  of  horror, 
but  Alfred  smiled  sadly.  "  You  do  not 
know  of  what  Ethelred  is  capable,  my 
friends.  In  his  present  condition  Alfgar  is 
unfit  to  become  Jarl,  thus  being  as  good  as 
dead  in  the  King's  opinion. 

"  My  father  had  barely  time  to  send  a 
man  to  warn  us  at  Lincoln,  and  we  fled 
from  home  just  in  time  to  get  to  the  fens 
and  escape.  Some  fourscore  men,  all  de- 
voted servants  of  my  father,  fled  with  us. 
Twice  Ethelred's  men  came  upon  us,  and 
we  beat  them  off,  but  wounds  and  sickness 
thinned  my  men,  and  these  are  all  I  have 
left.  Last  week  Sigrid  came  down  with 
fever,  and  we  had  to  fly  again;  but  this 
time,  thanks  to  you,  we  are  safe.  We  will 
never  forget  that  we  owe  our  lives  to  you, 
Jarl  Sigurd !" 

Astrid  immediately  took  charge  of  the 
sick  girl.  Thanks  to  his  temperate  life, 
Sigurd's  wound  promised  to  heal  rapidly, 
and  the  man  Wulf  proved  invaluable.  He 
had  been  educated  in  a  monastery,  and  was 
skilled  in  leech-craft,  and  seemed  devoted 
to  the  boy  Jarl. 

"  I  thought  to  be  killed  at  once,"  he  told 
Sigurd,  who  had  summoned  him.  "  You 
are  the  best  swordsman,  as  well  as  the  only 
merciful  viking,  whom  I  ever  met.  My  life 
is  yours,  Jarl,  if  so  you  will  have  it."  The 
man's  words  were  so  sincere  that  Sigurd 
accepted  his  offer  gladly,  for  he  was  an  ex- 
pert swordsman  as  well  as  leech,  and  could 
both  read  and  write,  which  was  no  Small 
accomplishment. 

A  council  was  now  held  on  the 
"  Crane's "  forecastle,  to  decide  on  what 


course  they  should  pursue.  They  finally 
came  to  the  conclusion  that  they  would  run 
south  and  cross  to  Flanders,  where  Alfred 
and  Sigrid  would  probably  find  their  fa- 
ther. As  soon  as  this  course  was  fixed  on, 
Biorn  took  charge  of  the  "  Snake,"  as  the 
other  vessel  was  named,  transferring  to 
her  that  evening. 

It  proved  well,  indeed,  that  he  did  so,  for 
during  the  night  a  gale  swept  down  out  of 
the  northeast,  and  bore  them  helplessly  be- 
fore it.  The  Saxons  on  the  "  Snake,"  most 
of  whom  had  never  been  to  sea  before,  were 
of  little  use,  and  even  Alfred  was  sick, 
though  Sigrid  escaped;  but  there  was  noth- 
ing to  do  save  to  keep  the  ships  before  the- 
wind.  It  was  bitterly  cold,  but  as  the 
Norsemen  did  not  mind  this  much,  and  the 
girls  were  well  wrapped  up,  no  one  suffered 
greatly. 

Sigurd  had  no  fears  for  the  two  ships, 
for  both  were  new  and  rode  the  waves 
easily.  The  ships  of  the  vikings  could  only 
sail  with  a  fair  or  a  side  wind,  and  as  they 
would  be  driven  far  past  Flanders  unless 
the  gale  broke  up  soon,  the  four  discussed 
the  situation  that  evening  in  the  "  Crane's  " 
cabin. 

"  We  are  certainly  getting  all  the  storms 
we  want,"  laughed  Sigurd  to  Astrid,  as  he 
came  in  and  shook  off  the  snow.  "  Shall 
we  take  the  chances  and  head  around  for 
the  southern  end  of  England?" 

"  No  !"  cried  Alfred.  "  Cannot  we  make 
for  Normandy?  There  are  many  vikings 
there,  and  it  is  settled  by  Norsemen." 

Sigurd  shook  his  head.  "  Not  unless  the 
wind  shifts." 

"  I  see,"  broke  in  Astrid,  "  that  you  are 
thinking  about  getting  me  back  home.  I 
admit  that  I  would  like  to  see  Vendland 
again,  but  why  don't  you  just  take  the 
simplest  course,  Sigurd,  run  before  the 
wind,  then  around  England  and  back  to 
King  Olaf?" 

"  It  sounds  easy,"  laughed  Sigurd,  "  and 
that  is  what  I  would  do  if  I  were  alone. 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


53 


But  with  you  and  Sigrid  on  board  I  don't 
like  to  take  unnecessary  risks." 

Sigrid  laughed  as  Alfred,  in  the  throes 
of  seasickness,  seized  his  cloak  and  left  the 
cabin.  "Don't  mind  us,  Jarl;  head  for 
Ireland  by  all  means !" 

"  Well,"  responded  Sigurd,  "  we'll  see 
how  things  look  in  the  morning.  I'm  going 
to  turn  in  now  and  get  some  sleep." 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

IN  BRETLAND. 

THE  morning  broke  dark  and  gloomy, 
with  no  land  in  sight.  Sigurd,  con- 
cluding that  they  had  been  driven  be- 
low the  Thames,  if  not  below  the  end  of 
England,  ordered  the  helmsman  to  steer 
due  west,  and  while  he  was  unable  to  com- 
municate with  the  "  Snake,"  he  saw  Biorn 
follow  his  example  at  once,  and  knew  that 
he  understood. 

The  gale  had  now  lessened  to  a  steady 
wind  from  the  northeast,  interspersed  with 
flurries  of  snow,  and  both  ships  drove 
steadily  along  under  half-canvas. 

For  two  days  they  held  this  course,  and 
then  Sigurd  held  a  shouted  conference  with 
Biorn.  It  seemed  evident  that  they  had 
been  carried  south  of  England,  so  the  prows 
were  turned  north,  and  the  next  morning 
land  appeared.  Alfred  had  found  his  sea- 
legs  by  this  time,  while  Sigrid  was  rapidly 
gaining  strength  and  color  from  the  salt 
sea-air,  which  drove  the  marsh  fever  out 
of  her.  She  was  a  very  pretty  girl,  indeed, 
with  her  blue  eyes  and  long  flaxen  hair, 
and  she  and  Astrid  were  firm  friends  from 
the  start. 

Wulf,  who  was  now  more  a  friend  than 
a  captive,  was  a  great  favorite  with  all  on 
board,  even  with  Alfred's  Saxons.  On  the 
morning  that  land  was  sighted,  he  drew 
Sigurd  aside. 

"  Jarl,  we  must  have  fresh  water  at  once. 


Three  of  the  casks  were  loosened  by  the 
storm  and  have  run  out;  there  is  only  a 
cask  or  two  of  ale  left." 

Sigurd  made  a  wry  face.  "  Well,  that 
will  keep  us  from  thirst,  and  the  men  like 
it  well  enough,  though  I  have  little  taste 
for  it;  but  perhaps  we  can  get  water  from 
some  river  along  the  coast  here,  or  from 
the  '  Snake.'  " 

Wulf  disagreed.  "  All  Ethelred's  Jarls 
and  Thanes  will  be  looking  for  us,  you  may 
be  sure,  and  as  soon  as  we  are  sighted  the 
housecarls  will  be  poured  down  wherever 
we  land." 

Sigurd  thought  it  over,  and  finally  sig- 
naled the  "  Snake."  Biorn  drew  alongside, 
but  when  Sigurd  mentioned  the  shortness 
of  water,  the  old  viking  gave  a  cry  of 
dismay. 

"  Why,  we  thought  to  get  some  from 
you  !  Never  mind,  we  are  drawing  into  the 
coast,  and  I  will  make  a  landing  and  find 
out  where  we  are.  We  cannot  be  very  far 
from  South  Wales,  and  once  there  it  will 
be  plain  sailing,  for  the  people  there  are  of 
my  own  race,  and  I  have  not  forgotten  the 
language  of  the  Cymry." 

So  they  steered  toward  the  shore,  which 
was  high  and  rocky.  After  coasting  along 
for  two  or  three  hours,  a  large  bay  was  re- 
vealed, half  frozen  over,  with  a  hamlet 
nestling  on  the  cliffs  above. 

"  They  are  fishing  folk,  most  like,"  said 
Alfred,  "  but  there  is  no  sign  of  a  river 
hereabouts.  We  may  have  to  melt  up  some 
of  that  ice!" 

Biorn's  ship  now  drew  carefully  in,  and 
broke  through  the  thin  outer  edge  of  ice. 
When  the  "  Snake  "  would  go  no  farther, 
Biorn  leaped  out  after  testing  the  ice  with 
oars,  and  a  dozen  men  followed  him  to  the 
shore.  They  found  the  hamlet  in  great 
consternation,  dreading  the  forays  of  the 
pirates,  but  Biorn  soon  appeased  their  fears, 
buying  a  goodly  quantity  of  fish  from  them, 
and  returned  to  the  ships. 

The     "  Snake "     drew     alongside     the 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


"  Crane."  "  No  fresh  water,  Jarl,"  re- 
ported Biorn.  "  Everything  is  frozen  fast, 
and  these  people  melt  ice  for  their  needs. 
They  say  there  is  a  river  half  a  mile  in- 
land, but  we  dare  not  risk  it." 

"  I  would  advise  that  if  possible  we  bear 
around  South  Wales  and  reach  up  for  the 
Northern  Kingdom.  It  will  only  be  a  day's 
difference,  and  we  won't  find  much  help 
among  the  people  on  this  coast.  We  might 
take  in  some  ice-cakes,  in  case  the  ale 
gives  out." 

"  How  long  does  it  take  to  reach  North 
Wales?"  asked  Sigurd. 

"  We  ought  to  get  there  to-morrow  night, 
or  the  next  day  at  latest,"  replied  Biorn, 
and  Sigurd  waved  assent.  The  ships 
were  rowed  up  to  the  ice  and  a  supply  of 
this  was  taken  on  board  each  ship ;  then  the 
sails  were  hoisted,  half  the  oars  put  out, 
and  at  full  speed  they  passed  along  the 
coast,  for  Sigurd  was  determined  not  to 
be  caught  in  another  tempest. 

Next  morning,  however,  the  Land's  End 
was  reached,  and  the  prows  turned  north. 
By  nightfall  the  land  was  in  sight  ahead, 
and  early  next  morning  they  drew  close 
into  shore. 

"  I  know  where  we  are,"  shouted  Biorn 
to  Sigurd.  "  Do  you  follow  me,  Jarl,  and 
we  will  speedily  come  to  an  open  river,  un- 
less I  am  greatly  mistaken." 

Before  noon,  indeed,  a  great  shout  of  joy 
went  up  from  the  men,  for  there  before 
them  was  a  bay,  with  an  open  river  flowing 
down.  True,  the  channel  was  narrow  and 
dangerous  for  ships,  for  the  ice  nearly  met 
on  either  side ;  but  the  "  Crane  "  followed 
the  "  Snake  "  closely,  and  they  entered  the 
channel.  Half  a  mile  from  the  mouth  this 
widened  out  and  turned  suddenly;  as  the 
"  Snake "  reached  the  bend  Sigurd  heard 
Biorn's  war-horn,  and  saw  his  men  arming 
themselves  in  haste. 

"To  arms,  men!"  he  shouted,  "and  be 
ready  for  whatever  may  befall !"  Alfred 
quickly  donned  his  armor  and  stood  by 


Sigurd  in  the  prow.  As  they  in  turn  came 
around  the  bend,  they  saw  the  reason  for 
Biorn's  preparations;  there  before  them  lay 
two  large  ships,  moored  for  the  winter  on 
shore,  with  a  camp  close  by.  From  their 
appearance  they  were  Danes,  and  high 
above,  on  a  neighboring  knoll,  could  be 
seen  the  roofs  of  a  town -of  goodly  size. 

As  the  "  Crane "  came  alongside  the 
"  Snake,"  Sigurd  saw  that  the  vikings  on 
shore  were  also  arming  and  assembling 
around  their  two  ships. 

"  This  is  the  town  of  Neath,  Jarl,"  cried 
Biorn,  as  he  leaped  on  board  the  "  Crane," 
"  and  it  was  here  that  I  was  born.  What 
ships  these  are  I  know  not;  shall  we  draw 
in  and  hail  them?" 

"  That  would  be  best,"  replied  Sigurd. 
"  Doubtless  they  are  some  vikings  who  are 
wintering  here,  but  it  is  strange,  indeed, 
that  they  are  allowed  to  remain  so  near  a 
town,  unless  they  came  on  a  peaceful 
errand." 

Sigurd  ordered  the  men  to  row  as  close 
to  shore  as  they  could.  The  ship  stopped 
two  or  three  hundred  yards  from  it,  for 
it  was  impossible  to  break  through  the  ice, 
and  Sigurd  blew  a  loud  blast  on  a  peace- 
horn.  In  answer  came  one  from  the  camp, 
and  a  dozen  men  left  the  two  ships  and 
started  over  the  ice  toward  the  "  Crane." 

As  these  came  near,  Astrid  uttered  a  little 
cry  and  caught  Sigurd's  arm.  "  Oh,  Fair- 
hair,  look  at  that  big  man  in  front !  That 
is  Halfdan,  the  brother  of  Queen  Gunhild, 
and  my  own  uncle  !" 

Sigurd  looked  closely  at  the  man,  re- 
membered him  well,  for  he  had  seen  him 
often  while  the  Jomsborg  men  were  at  King 
Svein's  court.  Halfdan  stopped  just  be- 
yond spear-cast  of  the  "  Crane." 

"  Who  are  you,  and  do  you  come  in  peace 
or  war?"  he  called. 

"  Good-morning !"  laughed  Sigurd,  "  don't 
you  know  your  friends,  Jarl?" 

The  other  started,  looked  keenly  at  the 
ship,  and  ran  forward.  "  Surely,  it  is 


THE  CROSS' AND  THE  HAMMER. 


55 


Sigurd  Fairhair !"  he  cried,  as  he  came 
near.  "  And  by  the  eye  of  Odin !  Am  I 
dreaming  or  is  this  Astrid?" 

"  Astrid  it  is,  uncle !"  laughed  the  girl, 
jumping  down  on  the  ice  and  throwing  her 
arms  around  his  neck.  The  Jarl  struggled 
to  disengage  himself,  and  cried  in  mock 
dismay : 

"  Help ;  help,  are  you  trying  to  make  me 
captive?  Let  loose  !  Respect  my  dignity  !" 

Sigurd  followed  Astrid  to  the  ice,  and 
clasped  Halfdan's  hand.  "  Be  careful, 
uncle,"  laughed  Astrid,  "  Sigurd  is  your 
equal  in  dignity  now  !" 

Sigurd  nodded  at  the  surprised  look  of 
the  Dane.  "  Yes,  I  am  one  of  Olaf 
Tryggveson's  men  now,  Jarl,  and  he  made 
me  a  Jarl  lately,  although  I  am  altogether 
too  young  for  such  an  honor." 

"  Nonsense,  nonsense  !"  replied  Halfdan, 
his  merry  eyes  gleaming  with  happiness, 
"  you  are  the  handsomest  Jarl  I  ever  saw  in 
my  life,  upon  my  word !  But  come  up  to 
the  camp." 

"  Wait,"  said  Sigurd,  turning  to  his 
ships.  "  Alfred,  do  you  and  Sigrid  join 
us.  Wulf,  you  and  Biorn  take  charge  of 
the  ships  and  lay  them  up  on  shore,  there 
beside  the  others.  We  are  with  friends." 

As  Alfred  and  Sigrid  climbed  down  to 
the  ice,  the  young  Jarl  presented  them  to 
Halfdan,  who  greeted  them  heartily. 

"  I  have  heard  of  your  father's  misfor- 
tune," he  exclaimed,  "  and  I  was  sorry, 
indeed,  for  I  fought  against  him  three  or 
four  years  ago,  and  he  was  a  noble  foeman. 
However,  he  is  safe  in  Flanders  now,  and 
is  like  to  return  before  long." 

"  Why,  what  do  you  mean  ?"  cried  Al- 
fred, in  surprise. 

"  Come  along  to  the  camp  and  I'll  tell 
you."  Halfdan  led  the  way  to  the  shore. 
"  It's  too  cold  to  be  standing  out  here  talk- 
ing." 

As  they  entered  the  camp,  the  news 
spread  that  a  party  of  Jomsvikings  were 
among  the  arrivals,  and  a  loud  blast  went 


up  from  the  horns,  while  the  Danes  met 
them  with  shouts  of  joy,  for  the  men  of 
Jomsborg  were  prime  favorites  with  King 
Svein's  men.  Sigurd  found  several  whom 
he  knew,  while  Astrid  was  met  with  fresh 
cheers.  As  they  entered  the  large  hut  of 
Halfdan,  the  Jarl  drove  the  men  off. 

"  Get  out  of  here  !"  he  cried.  "  Go  down 
and  help  stow  the  ships  up  on  land  beside 
ours.  We  have  much  to  talk  over  here,  and 
would  be  left  in  peace." 

With  a  last  cheer,  the  men  vanished,  and 
Halfdan  closed  the  door. 

"  Here  is  food  and  water,  friends,  if  you 
are  hungry." 

"  We  have  plenty  of  food,  but  a  drink 
of  water  would  not  be  amiss,"  answered 
Sigurd.  "  And  now,  how  come  you  here, 
in  Wales?" 

"  First  make  yourselves  comfortable." 
Halfdan  piled  furs  along  the  wall,  for 
Astrid  and  Sigrid,  while  he  and  the  two 
boys  sat  on  the  long  wooden  bench.  "  Well, 
of  course  you  remember  the  oath  that 
Svein  made  that  night?  He  wasn't  in  such 
a  hurry  as  you  Jomsvikings  were,  but  he 
has  been  making  big  preparations.  He  sent 
me  here  right  after  the  news  of  Hiorunga 
Bay  arrived,  for  he  had  counted  on  your 
men  making  a  descent  on  Ethelred  from 
the  west  as  well  as  from  Northumbria, 
where  he  himself  will  land  in  the  spring 
or  summer. 

"  I  arrived  here  a  month  or  two  ago,  and 
have  arranged  matters  with  Idwal  ap 
Meirig,  the  King  of  North  Wales.  What 
barbarous  names  these  Welsh  people 
have !" 

"  Probably  they  think  ours  just  as  bad," 
laughed  Sigrid,  "  for  they  hate  everything 
Saxon;  and  as  for  your  Norse  names,  I 
am  sure  they  used  to  sound  harsh,  even  to 
us!" 

"  Well,  in  any  case,  King  Idwal  is  up  in 
the  town  yonder,  has  agreed  to  join  us,  and 
we  see  him  nearly  every  day.  Now,  tell 
me  something  about  yourself,  Sigurd." 


56 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


It  was  late  when  Sigurd  finished  his 
tale,  so  Halfdan,  who  had  given  orders 
meanwhile,  showed  the  two  girls  to  a  hut 
that  had  been  hastily  fitted  up  for  them, 
and  shared  his  own  with  the  boys  for  the 
night. 


CHAPTER  XV. 

IN    WINTER   QUARTERS. 

NEXT  morning  Halfdan's  men  joined 
forces  with  the  new  arrivals,  and 
got  the  two  ships  up  on  the  shore, 
dismantling  and  unloading  them,  while 
parties  of  men  hastened  out  to  the  sur- 
rounding woods,  and  returned  with  great 
quantities  of  firewood  and  timber,  with 
which  fresh  huts  were  built. 

This  was  finished  by  evening,  for  Half- 
dan  had  a  hundred  and  fifty  men,  and  many 
hands  made  light  labor.  For  several  days 
the  Norsemen  rested  quietly,  for  they  had 
many  wounded,  and  some  of  the  Saxons 
were  still  down  with  fever.  Sigrid,  how- 
ever, was  now  almost  well,  and  the  jovial 
roughness  of  Halfdan  amused  her  and 
brought  the  roses  back  to  her  cheeks. 

Sigurd  and  Alfred  wished  to  visit  the 
town  above,  and  if  possible  to  take  up  their 
quarters  there,  but  Halfdan  discouraged 
them  from  doing  so. 

"  King  Idwal  watches  us  sharp  enough, 
for  he  has  suspicions  of  every  Northman 
within  a  hundred  miles.  One  cannot  blame 
him,  either;  the  vikings  have  ravaged  poor 
Bretland  terribly,  destroying  monasteries 
and  towns,  and  burning  and  plundering. 
Your  own  man  Biorn  is  a  sample;  he  was 
carried  off  in  his  youth. 

"  As  for  visiting  the  town,  it  is  not 
worth  while.  There  is  nothing  there  save 
a  great  castle  and  a  cluster  of  dirty  little 
houses,  and  in  any  case  Idwal  has  forbid- 
den our  men  to  enter  the  town.  Once  a 
week  the  country  folk  come  down  here  with 
their  market  stuff,  and  Idwal  sends  us  ale 


by  the  cask.  Never  fear,  he  will  be  down 
pretty  soon  to  see  for  himself  who  these 
new  vikings  are." 

For  two  weeks  they  remained  in  camp, 
seeing  nothing  of  the  Welsh  king,  but  all 
were  greatly  interested  in  the  people,  who 
brought  fresh  meat  and  food  into  camp 
once  a  week.  Indeed;  the  vikings'  camp 
at  these  times  assumed  the  appearance  of 
a  fair,  for  most  of  the  men  made  small 
objects  which  the  country  people  took  in 
exchange,  and  many  merchants  set  up  per- 
manent booths  inside  the  camp.  The 
Welsh  people  were  smaller  by  far  than  the 
Norsemen  or  Danes,  and  their  bright, 
quick  eyes  and  black  straight  hair  con- 
trasted strangely  with  the  Northmen  and 
Saxons,  most  of  whom  were  fair. 

Sigurd  and  Alfred  had  at  first  feared 
that  the  Saxons  and  Danes,  hereditary  ene- 
mies, would  not  mingle  well ;  but  their 
fears  proved  to  be  unfounded.  Halfdan 
discovered  from  the  country  people  that  in 
the  forests  to  the  west,  only  a  few  miles 
distant,  wolves  were  a  terrible  scourge;  so 
the  men  set  to  work  and  made  skis  for 
themselves,  and  even  Sigrid  learned  to  use 
the  "  snow-skates,"  as  the  Saxons  called 
the  long  wooden  runners.  In  the  second 
week  of  their  stay  the  four  young  people 
and  Halfdan  took  a  score  of  men,  leaving 
the  camp  in  charge  of  Biorn,  and  for  three 
days  went  off  on  a  wolf-hunt  in  the  forest. 

On  their  return  Biorn  told  them  that 
word  had  arrived  in  their  absence  from 
King  Idwal,  who  intended  to  visit  them  on 
the  following  day,  with  all  his  court.  Great 
preparations  were  made  for  his  reception. 
Pine  boughs  were  brought  in  from  the  for- 
est, with  which  the  huts  were  decorated 
gayly,  and  Halfdan's  large  hut  was  hung 
with  tapestries  and  cloths,  which  Sigurd 
found  in  the  cargo  of  the  vessel  which 
Biorn  had  captured. 

All  the  men  rubbed  up  their  armor  and 
weapons,  and  when  in  the  morning  the 
Welsh  were  seen  winding  down  the  hill, 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


57 


They  were  greeted  6j/  o  loud  burst  from  the    horns  of  the  vikings. 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


59 


the  force  was  drawn  up  in  three  divisions, 
the  Danes,  Norsemen  and  Saxons  grouping 
themselves  together  under  the  standards 
of  Halfdan,  Sigurd  and  Alfred.  Presently 
the  Welsh  arrived  in  the  valley  leading  to 
the  camp,  and  their  coming  was  greeted  by 
a  loud  burst  from  the  horns  of  the  vikings. 

Leading  the  way  came  a  troop  of  arch- 
ers, behind  whom,  mounted  on  small 
shaggy  ponies,  rode  the  King  and  his  court. 
Idwal  was  a  larger  man  than  most  of  his 
followers,  with  keen  black  eyes  and  firm 
features,  shaved  in  the  Danish  fashion, 
with  two  long  mustaches.  As  he  came  up 
Halfdan  advanced  and  greeted  him. 

"  Welcome,  my  lord  King !  It  gives  us 
pleasure  to  return  the  hospitality  of  your 
castle !" 

Idwal  smiled.  "  Truly,  Jarl,  I  am  glad 
that  these  men  of  yours  are  not  minded  to 
foray  my  borders  !  We  would  have  a  hard 
time  of  it  to  repel  such  a  force  as  this. 
I  heard  that  you  had  been  joined  by  a 
fresh  band  of  vikings,  so  came  down  to 
assure  myself  that  we  were  in  no  danger." 

At  this  Halfdan  motioned  Sigurd  and 
his  friends  to  advance  and  presented  them 
to  the  King.  The  latter  frowned  as  Alfred 
came  forward,  and  swept  his  eye  over  the 
band  of  Saxons. 

"  It  is  many  years  since  a  Saxon  has 
dared  seek  hospitality  from  the  Cymry,  my 
lad,"  he  remarked.  Then  Alfred  told  his 
story,  and  the  king's  face  cleared. 

"  Well,  to  be  frank,  I  have  small  love 
for  Saxons,  but  since  you  are  enemies  of 
Ethelred,  that  is  another  matter.  Tell  me, 
in  case  your  father  returned  home  and  I 
joined  with  King  Svein,  would  you  be  for 
or  against  me?" 

He  gazed  keenly  at  Alfred,  but  the  lad 
met  the  look  squarely,  though  with  a  smile. 
"  As  to  that,  my  lord  King,  I  can  only  say 
that  I  would  fight  for  my  own  land  against 
the  invader,  whoever  he  was;  yet  if  my 
father  thinks  it  right  to  join  King  Svein, 
as  well  he  may,  I  will  be  at  his  side." 


Halfdan  broke  in  with  a  laugh.  "  Don't 
be  afraid,  my  lord,  this  Saxon  will  not  have 
to  be  feared  for  some  time  to  come !  I  dare 
say  that  if  you  make  a  foray  against  Ethel- 
red  this  spring,  he  would  stand  as  stoutly 
at  your  side  as  any  of  your  nobles.  But 
come  into  the  camp,  my  lord." 

The  vikings  opened  a  path  between  their 
ranks,  and  Idwal  led  his  men  through  them. 
In  an  open  space  amid  the  huts,  Halfdan 
had  cleared  away  the  snow  and  stretched 
a  large  sail  over  a  number  of  long  tables, 
while  on  either  side  blazed  .a  dozen  great 
fires. 

"  By  my  faith,"  cried  King  Idwal,  "  this 
is  a  right  royal  reception,  Jarl !  An  open 
air  banquet  is  far  more  to  my  liking  than 
one  inside  these  huts,  and  these  fires  would 
warm  an  army !" 

So  saying,  the  king  tossed  aside  his  fur 
cloak,  and  Sigurd  saw  that  he  wore  a  light 
suit  of  armor  beneath  it.  In  the  king's 
train  were  some  twoscore  nobles,  and  a 
bishop,  to  whom  Halfdan  accorded  the 
place  of  honor.  Among  the  Welsh,  bish- 
ops and  priests  were  honored  even  above 
the  king,  and  they  found  Bishop  Dafydd 
a  learned,  kindly,  and  intensely  religious 
man,  who  was  at  once  interested  in  Astrid 
and  Wulf,  with  both  of  whom  he  conversed 
at  great  length. 

It  was  well,  indeed,  that  Halfdan  had 
been  hunting  for  three  days  previously,  for 
his  stock  of  venison  was  heavily  drawn 
upon.  Great  fish  were  brought  in,  newly 
taken  from  the  river  below,  and  to  the  de- 
light of  the  Welshmen  a  huge  boar's  head, 
in  the  Saxon  style,  was  placed  before  the 
king.  The  vikings  spared  no  pains  to  make 
the  feast  a  notable  one,  and  to  Sigurd's 
satisfaction  the  presence  of  Bishop  Dafydd 
and  his  men  prevented  it  from  becoming  a 
wild  carouse,  as  the  Norsemen  were  only 
too  apt  to  make  it. 

Before  the  King  left  that  evening  there 
was  an  exchange  of  gifts,  as  was  cus- 
tomary. Biorn  and  Jarl  Halfdan,  who 


60 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


were  skillful  smiths,  had  the  week  before 
made  a  beautiful  byrnie,  of  woven  gold 
rings,  and  this  was  presented  to  the  king, 
who  was  delighted  with  it. 

He  presented  Halfdan  with  a  great  boar- 
hound,  and  to  Sigurd  he  gave  a  cloak, 
edged  with  fur,  the  scarlet  cloth  em- 
broidered in  silver  thread.  As  he  had  been 
informed  of  the  presence  of  the  two  girls, 
he  had  thoughtfully  brought  for  them  new 
outfits  of  garments  suited  to  their  rank. 

Idwal  returned  to  his  castle  that  evening, 
and  the  bond  between  him  and  the  vikings 
was  firmly  cemented.  He  assured  Jarl 
Halfdan  that  as  soon  as  King  Svein  landed 
in  the  east  he  would  pour  a  flood  of  men 
over  the  West  Saxon  earldoms,  and  Half- 
dan  had  no  doubt  that  the  Danish  king 
would  fulfill  the  oath  he  had  sworn  at  his 
accession  feast. 

After  this  the  camp  settled  down  for  the 
remainder  of  the  winter.  Every  week 
hunting  parties,  on  skis,  brought  in  fresh 
meat  from  the  surrounding  forests,  while 
their  arms  were  repaired  and  added  to  by 
the  smiths.  The  chiefs  of  the  Northmen 
were  all  trained  armorers,  and  his  work  at 
the  forge  added  greatly  to  Sigurd's  strength 
and  widened  his  shoulders  immensely. 

The  two  girls  had  a  most  enjoyable 
time,  for  every  man  in  the  camp  worshiped 
them.  They  joined  the  hunting  parties, 
and  many  a  wolf  fell  before  Astrid's  bow, 
while  Sigrid,  though  less  warlike,  took 
part  with  equal  zest. 

The  time  passed  away  rapidly,  and  in 
March  the  snows  melted  and  the  four  ships 
were  run  out  and  overhauled.  They  were 
freshly  pitched  and  calked,  the  masts  were 
stepped,  and  at  last  they  lay  at  anchor, 
fully  ready  for  the  sea. 

King  Idwal  paid  the  camp  a  second  visit, 
after  which  the  chiefs  returned  to  the  castle 
with  him  for  a  few  days.  He  sent  down 
provisions  of  all  kinds  for  the  ships,  and 
at  the  beginning  of  April,  Sigurd  took 
leave  of  Halfdan. 


They  gathered  in  the  Jarl's  hut  on  the 
evening  before  sailing. 

"  Now,  Jarl,"  said  Sigurd,  "  I  suppose 
you  will  take  Astrid  home  with  you?" 

"  That  depends,"  replied  Halfdan,  quiz- 
zically, "  upon  whether  she  wants  to  go  or 
not !  She  seems  to  like  wandering  about 
the  world,  with  a  knight-errant  to  rescue 
her  and  guard  her  from  harm !" 

Astrid  blushed,  and  cried,  "  That's  not 
fair,  uncle  !  I'm  going  home  with  you — but 
listen !  Why  can't  you  come  with  us  to 
King  Olaf,  and  go  home  by  the  north  ? 
It  is  just  as  short  that  way,  and  far  less 
dangerous !" 

The  big  Jarl  leaped  to  his  feet.  "  Hur- 
rah !  I  never  even  thought  of  that ;  I 
thought  to  go  home  around  the  south  of 
England,  but  in  truth  this  way  is  as  short, 
and  I  would  fain  see  this  King  Olaf,  whom 
you  praise  so  highly." 

It  had  been  arranged  that  Halfdan  was 
not  to  sail  till  the  next  week,  so  he  at  once 
dashed  out  and  called  his  chiefs  together.' 
Telling  them  of  the  new  plan,  the  men 
went  to  work,  by  torchlight,  and  finished 
loading  his  two  ships,  and  by  morning  all 
was  ready. 

With  a  fair  wind  they  reached  out  into 
the  bay,  and  three  mornings  later,  after 
coasting  along  the  Irish  shore,  they  came 
in  sight  of  the  towers  of  Dublin. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

AN   AMBUSCADE. 

SIGURD  was  received  with  unbounded 
joy  by  King  Olaf,   for   he   had  been 
given   up   for  lost  in   the  storm   that 
swept  the  coast  just  before  his  departure. 
Halfdan  stayed  in  Dublin  for  a  week,  then 
decided  to  return  home  without  further  de- 
lay. 

Sigurd  parted   with  Astrid  sorrowfully, 
for  they  had  become  very  dear  to  each  other 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


61 


in  their  wanderings,  and  although  Alfred 
and  Sigrid  remained  with  him,  he  knew 
that  he  would  miss  her  greatly. 

"  Never  mind,"  he  said,  as  they  walked 
down  to  the  ships,  "  we  will  land  in  Nor- 
way this  summer  or  fall,  and  be  sure  that 
I  will  turn  up  at  the  Danish  court,  or  in 
Vendland,  not  long  after." 

"  I'll  be  glad  to  see  Vagn  once  more, 
when  I  get  home,"  said  Astrid.  "  It  will 
seem  almost  as  good  as  seeing  you."  Half- 
dan  had  told  them  of  Vagn's  safe  arrival 
home,  so  that  Jarl  Eirik  had  evidently  been 
true  to  his  word. 

Sigurd  and  Alfred,  in  the  "  Crane,"  ac- 
companied Halfdan's  ships  for  a  few  miles ; 
then,  with  a  last  farewell  to  Astrid,  the 
"  Crane "  was  turned  about,  and  sought 
Dublin  again. 

Sigurd's  duties  were  light  at  the  court. 
Olaf's  Irish  kingdom  was  not  divided  in 
districts,  ruled  by  Jarls,  as  was  Norway; 
so  that  Sigurd  had  little  to  do  beyond  com- 
manding the  courtmen.  Alfred  had  not 
done  homage  to  King  Olaf,  for  he  resolved 
to  remain  true  to  his  own  land;  neverthe- 
less, the  King  gave  him  a  command,  and 
Alfred  bore  himself  well  indeed. 

With  the  beginning  of  summer  Olaf  took 
all  his  warships  out  of  the  water,  scraped 
the  bottoms,  and  gave  them  a  thorough 
overhauling.  Thorir  Klakke  was  still  in 
Dublin,  and  Sigurd  found  that  he  was  urg- 
ing the  King  to  sail  as  soon  as  might  be 
for  Norway,  saying  that  the  bonders 
would  flock  to  him  on  his  arrival,  so  that 
he  need  not  take  so  large  a  force.  King 
Olaf,  who  thoroughly  understood  his  treach- 
ery, did  not  undeceive  him;  but  to  Sigurd 
he  said,  one  night  after  Thorir  had  left 
the  hall: 

"  Jarl,  if  ever  a  man  deserved  hanging, 
there  is  one.  While  you  were  absent  in 
England,  two  half-brothers  of  mine  were 
driven  from  Norway  by  Jarl  Hakon,  and 
came  to  me  here.  Thorir  tried  to  bribe 
them,  and  fortunately  they  let  him  think 


that  they  fell  in  with  his  plans,  which  he 
disclosed  fully. 

"Jarl  Hakon,  in  truth,  sent  him  here. 
Thorir  will  try  to  slay  me  on  the  voyage," 
the  King  smiled  grimly,  "  but  if  he  fails,  he 
is  to  get  me  on  shore  at  a  certain  point 
where  Hakon  will  keep  men  in  waiting  day 
and  night.  These  men  are  to  fall  on  me 
and  kill  me." 

Sigurd  gave  a  cry  of  anger,  and  the 
priest,  Thangbrand,  growled  out,  "  Let  me 
attend  to  him,  Olaf!  I'll  warrant  he  does 
not  trouble  you  any  more !" 

Olaf  laughed  heartily.  "  Thangbrand, 
you  are  more  fitted  for  a  viking  than  for  a 
priest !  If  I  ever  win  Norway,  I  will  send 
you  to  Iceland  to  convert  that  island  to 
Christ." 

The  priest's  face  lit  up.  "  Thanks,  my 
King!  It  is  a  shame  that  so  fair  an  island 
as  that  should  have  no  church  of  Christ  in 
all  its  length !  It  may  be  that  I  will  meet 
resistance  there,  but  methinks  I  can  hold 
my  own." 

Sigurd  laughed  at  this  characteristic 
speech.  Thangbrand  was  a  strange  mixture 
of  priest  and  warrior.  Driven  from  home 
for  his  quarrelsome  disposition,  he  had 
joined  himself  to  Olaf:  but  in  reality  the 
man  was  deeply  religious,  and  he  was,  in- 
deed, the  ideal  man  to  carry  the  Cross  to 
heathen  Iceland.  In  those  days  the  Cross 
and  sword  went  together,  and  the  old  gods 
of  Norway  knew  many  martyrs  to  their 
faith  before  Christianity  was  established 
in  the  land,  in  later  years.  Right  or 
wrong,  this  was  the  spirit  of  the  age,  for 
men  overlooked  the  fact  that  Christ's  gos- 
pel was  one  of  peace,  and  in  their  enthusi- 
asm and  religious  fervor  they  spread  it  with 
fire  and  sword. 

There  was  .  much  irregular  fighting 
around  Dublin,  for  the  Irish  kings  were 
ever  striving  to  drive  the  Norsemen  from 
their  land.  They  fought  bravely,  but  their 
men  were  ill-armed  compared  with  the  vi- 
kings, and  Olaf  had  no  trouble  in  preserving 


62 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE,  HAMMER. 


order  for  many  miles  around  the  city.  His 
brother-in-law,  Olaf  Kvaran,  was  away  on 
a  trip  to  Iceland  at  this  time. 

"  How  would  you  like,  Jarl,"  said  Olaf 
to  Sigurd  one  evening,  "  to  visit  King  Brian 
Boroimhe?  I  am  minded  to  make  peace 
with  him,  for  when  I  go  to  Norway  I  want 
to  leave  Dublin  in  security,  and  my  brother' 
is  not  to  be  relied  on.  A  firm  peace  with 
King  Brian  for  at  least  a  year  would  be 
an  excellent  thing." 

"  I  would  be  glad,  indeed,"  replied 
Sigurd,  "  for  I  have  heard  so  much  about 
the  interior  of  Ireland  that  I  would  fain 
see  it." 

"  Well,  I  will  have  letters  written  in  the 
Irish  tongue,"  said  the  King,  "  and  do  you 
take  what  men  you  will,  together  with  an 
interpreter.  Be  ready  to  start  next  Mon- 
day, and  I  think  you  will  find  the  King  at 
Kells,  a  large  place  some  thirty  miles  to 
the  west.  However,  I  will  provide  a  reli- 
able guide." 

Thangbrand,  the  priest,  hearing  of  the 
embassy,  eagerly  sought  leave  to  accompany 
Sigurd,  which  Olaf  willingly  granted. 
So,  on  the  following  Monday,  Sigurd,  the 
priest,  and  a  score  of  men  left  Dublin. 
Their  weapons  were  all  in  peace-bands,  and 
an  Irish  captive  was  taken  as  guide  and  in- 
terpreter, having  promised  to  lead  them  to 
Kells  in  exchange  for  his  liberty. 

Sigurd  laughed  when  Thangbrand  joined 
the  party.  The  huge  priest  wore  a  byrnie 
under  his  gown,  a  light  steel  cap  on  his 
head,  and  at  his  saddle-bow  was  shield  and 
sword. 

"  No  one  knows  what  may  happen,"  he 
replied  stoutly,  to  the  boy's  peal  of  laugh- 
ter, "  we  may  be  waylaid  by  these  Irish 
thieves,  or  this  guide  may  lead  us  astray, 
and  it  is  best  to  be  prepared  for  anything." 

Kells  was  only  a  good  day's  march  away, 
so  they  set  forward  briskly.  After  reach- 
ing the  bounds  of  Olaf's  territory  the  road 
lay  through  woods  and  swamps  for  a  dozen 
miles;  but  toward  evening  they  emerged  on 


an  open  plain,  partly  cultivated,  and  saw  in 
the  distance  the  spires  and  towers  of  a  large 
city.  Several  times  they  had  been  stopped 
by  bands  of  Irish,  but  their  guide  served 
them  faithfully. 

Sigurd  was  amazed  at  sight  of  Kells. 
"  Why,  this  is  wonderful !"  he  said.  "  I 
had  no  idea  that  there  was  such  civiliza- 
tion so  near  to  Dublin !" 

Thangbrand  smiled.  "  Kells  has  seldom 
been  ravaged  by  vikings,  for  many  years ;  it 
is  a  strong  place,  with  a  great  monastery 
in  the  town.  I  have  been  here  once  before, 
and  found  that  the  land  is  beautiful  enough 
in  times  of  peace,  but  in  war-time  it  would 
be  well-nigh  impossible  to  reach  the  city." 

Sigurd  saw  that  this  was  so,  as  they  ap- 
proached, for  on  either  side  of  the  road 
were  defenses,  and  several  stone  castles 
came  in  sight.  Just  at  sunset  they  entered 
the  gates  of  the  town,  and  their  guide 
spurred  ahead  to  find  quarters  for  the  men. 

As  they  passed  through  the  streets  they 
met  with  sour  looks  and  loud  curses  from 
the  Irish,  who  hated  the  Northmen  bitterly, 
with  only  too  much  reason.  The  vikings 
had  ravaged  the  fairest  vales  of  Erin,  had 
destroyed  her  monasteries  and  splendid 
civilization,  and  but  for  the  strong  hand 
of  King  Brian  would  have  overrun  the 
country  utterly.  That  night  they  took 
their  quarters  in  a  large  inn,  and  the  next 
morning  visited  the  court. 

The  King's  palace  was  far  beyond  any- 
thing Sigurd  had  ever  seen,  even  in  Lon- 
don. It  was  built  of  stone,  and  the  great 
hall  within  was  a  blaze  of  arms  and  tapes- 
tries. The  nobles  who  thronged  the  hall 
were  clad  much  as  were  the  Northmen, 
but  their  golden  bracelets  and  cloak-pins 
were  richly  wrought,  and  the  precious 
metal  seemed  abundant. 

Sigurd  led  his  men  to  the  high-seat,  and 
bowed  low  to  King  Brian,  the  famous  chief- 
tain. The  latter  was  a  powerful,  stern- 
faced  man  of  some  sixty  years,  and  he 
opened  and  read  the  letters  of  Olaf  with  a 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


63 


frown,  afterwards  handing  them  to  a  monk 
who  stood  at  his  side. 

"  Sir  Jarl,"  he  said,  without  rising,  fix- 
ing his  gray  eyes  on  Sigurd,  "  I  will  have 
an  answer  written  at  once.  For  the  pres- 
ent you  and  your  men  will  be  quartered 
in  my  palace  here.  King  Olaf  is  a  brave 
and  worthy  man,  and  I  am  glad  to  conclude 
a  year's  truce  with  him ;  were  other  North- 
men like  him,  Erin  would  be  a  happier 
land." 

The  monk  translated  the  King's  words, 
and  bowing  low,  Sigurd  retired.  Thang- 
brand  at  once  visited  the  monastery,  taking 
Sigurd  with  him ;  and  although  the  good 
monks  were  somewhat  surprised  at  the 
warlike  appearance  of  the  priest,  they  en- 
tertained their  visitors  well,  and  showed 
them  over  the  buildings. 

Next  morning  Sigurd  had  another  audi- 
ence with  King  Brian,  who  handed  him  a 
parchment  for  King  Olaf,  and  presented 
him  with  a  heavy  golden  arm-ring;  after 
which  the  Norsemen  left  the  city  at  once 
on  their  return  journey. 

They  rode  along  at  a  good  pace,  and  as 
they  came  near  the  boundaries  of  Olaf's 
territory  S  guard  and  Thangbrand  rode 
somewhat  ahead  of  the  party ;  for  Thang- 
brand,  who  was  an  adept  at  horsemanship, 
of  which  the  young  Jarl  knew  little,  was 
showing  Sigurd  how  to  make  his  steed  cur- 
vet and  prance,  and  thus  they  insensibly 
drew  ahead  of  the  rest. 

They  turned  a  bend  in  the  road,  which 
wound  along  beneath  thick  trees;  and  as 
they  did  so  a  number  of  men  sprang  to 
their  horses'  heads,  and  others  sprang  at 
Sigurd  and  Thangbrand,  striving  to  pull 
them  from  their  saddles.  At  the  same  in- 
stant, before  they  could  grasp  their  weap- 
ons, men  dropped  on  them  from  the 
branches  overhead,  and  a  minute  later  the 
two  Norsemen,  bound  hand  and  foot,  were 
being  hurried  away  through  the  forest 
depths. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

KET1L   TURNS   UP. 

FAR  behind  them  sounded  a  few  faint 
shouts  and  horns,  as  the  men  reached 
the  spot  where  the  two  leaders  had 
been  ambushed;  then  these  died  away  into 
silence.  Sigurd  saw  that  they  were  carried 
by  a  band  of  two  dozen  Irish,  who  were 
hastening  north  through  the  forest.  He 
started  to  speak  to  the  priest,  who  was 
borne  at  his  side,  but  one  of  the  men  struck 
him  roughly  on  the  mouth,  with  a  sharp 
command  in  Irish,  and  he  ceased. 

At  nightfall  the  band  halted  beside  a 
stream,  and  Sigurd  judged  they  had  trav- 
eled several  miles  from  the  scene  of  their 
capture.  A  blazing  fire  was  built,  over 
which  the  men  cooked  their  meal,  the  two 
captives  being  flung  down  beneath  a  large 
tree. 

"  What  fools  we  were  to  leave  the 
guide !"  growled  Thangbrand  into  his  thick 
black  beard.  "  I  wish  they  would  give  us 
somewhat  to  eat." 

His  wish  was  gratified  immediately,  for 
the  leader  of  the  band  approached,  cut  the 
ropes  that  bound  their  hands,  and  gave 
them  bread  and  meat,  and  a  horn  of  water 
from  the  stream.  After  this  they  were 
bound  again. 

"  They  seem  to  be  expecting  someone." 
exclaimed  Sigurd,  "  did  you  note  that  the 
leader  had  sent  men  out  in  all  directions?" 

This  had  indeed  been  done  as  soon  as 
they  arrived,  and  an  hour  later  there  was  a 
shout,  and  into  the  firelight  came  a  second 
body  of  men.  As  they  saw  them,  Sigurd 
gave  a  cry  of  amazement,  for  at  their  head 
was  Ketil  Gormson,  whom  he  had  left  in 
London  the  winter  before! 

The  new  arrivals  were  also  Irish,  Ketil 
being  the  only  foreigner.  The  leader  of 
the  first  party  greeted  him,  and  Ketil  put 
into  his  hand  a  bag  that  clinked  pleasantly. 
Then  he  stepped  forward  to  Sigurd's  side. 

"  So  I  have  you  at  last,  my  lord  Jarl !" 


64 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


he  cried,  an  evil  light  in  his  dark  eyes. 
"  It  is  a  far  cry  from  London  to  Ireland,  but 
I  have  watched  and  waited  patiently." 

"  It  is  a  pity  that  I  didn't  strike  harder 
that  night!"  replied  Sigurd.  "What  is 
your  object  in  this  attack?" 

Ketil  laughed  shortly.  "  You  go  with  me 
to  Jarl  Hakon,  my  fine  fellow,  and  as  for 
this  follower  of  the  white  Christ,  I  think 
I  will  turn  him  over  to  these  good  friends 
of  mine  in  the  morning." 

Sigurd  turned  pale,  for  he  knew  that  any 
Norsemen  who  fell  into  the  hands  of  the 
Irish  obtained  short  shrift.  Thangbrand, 
however,  roared  out : 

"  Loose  my  hands,  you  traitor,  and  face 
me  with  drawn  blade !" 

"  So,"  sneered  Ketil,  "  I  thought  that 
priests  of  your  God  were  meek  and  hum- 
ble men,  willing  to  die  for  their  faith!" 

Thangbrand  flushed  under  the  reproof, 
and  fell  silent.  Ketil  turned  away,  set  a 
guard  over  the  captives,  and  in  a  few  min- 
utes the  band  lay  sleeping  in  their  cloaks 
beneath  the  trees. 

The  Norsemen's  weapons  had  not  been 
taken  from  them,  but  as  they  were  bound 
firmly  they  were  of  no  use.  Sigurd,  how- 
ever, saw  that  the  peace-bands  had  been 
torn  from  his  sword  in  the  hasty  flight 
through  the  forest. 

An  hour  after  this  he  felt  Thangbrand's 
hands  touch  his.  The  two  captives  lay 
side  by  side,  and  their  guard  was  sitting 
a  few  feet  away,  nodding  sleepily.  Turn- 
ing by  inches,  Sigurd  looked  at  the  priest, 
and  saw  him  motion  toward  the  unbound 
sword. 

Sigurd,  very  slowly  and  cautiously, 
rolled  over  on  his  face,  bringing  the 
weapon  within  reach  of  Thangbrand,  who 
at  the  same  time  turned  his  back.  Thus 
his  hands,  after  a  little  vain  searching, 
met  the  hilt  of  the  weapon  and  slowly 
drew  it  forth.  An  instant  later  their  guard 
straightened  up  and  strolled  over  to  them. 

Sigurd  lay  on  his  face,  and  with  a  quick 


movement  Thangbrand  had  thrust  the 
drawn  blade  beneath  him.  The  guard, 
thinking  that  both  were  asleep,  turned 
away,  humming  an  air,  and  Sigurd  caught 
a  faint  rasping  noise  as  the  sword  blade 
cut  through  the  priest's  bonds. 

Soon  the  guard  returned,  and  stooped 
over  Sigurd,  who  lay  nearer  him,  to  assure 
himself  that  his  bonds  were  right.  As  he 
did  so,  Thangbrand  drew  him  down  to  the 
earth,  his  hands  about  the  man's  throat. 

The  struggle  was  brief  and  noiseless.  In 
a  few  seconds  the  man  relaxed,  and  the 
priest  quickly  bound  and  gagged  him;  then 
he  cut  Sigurd's  bonds,  whispering: 

"  If  my  hands  were  not  so  stiff  I  would 
have  done  better." 

Indeed,  Sigurd  found  that  his  hands  and 
feet  were  too  stiff  to  move,  for  he  had 
been  tightly  bound.  They  both  sat  for  a 
moment  rubbing  their  limbs,  then  arose. 

*  Which  way,  Jarl  ?" 

"West,  Thangbrand.  Once  we  strike 
men  belonging  to  King  Brian  we  will  be 
all  right,  for  his  bracelet  here  will  be 
known,  and  you  are  a  priest,  too." 

Without  a  word  more  they  stepped  away, 
each  picking  up  a  light  shield  from  beside 
the  sleeping  men  as  they  went.  The  for- 
est was  dark,  but  as  the  moon  was  just 
rising  Sigurd  knew  that  their  way  would 
soon  be  light  enough  to  travel  fast. 

In  half  an  hour  they  were  well  away 
from  the  camp,  and  both  broke  into  a  swift 
trot,  threading  their  way  among  the  trees, 
and  as  far  as  they  were  able  heading  west. 
The  trees  were  roughly  barked  on  the 
north,  and  this  guided  them  somewhat,  for 
both  men  were  accustomed,  at  home  in 
Norway,  to  finding  their  way  through  the 
forest  by  such  signs. 

"  Hold  up,  lad,"  panted  Thangbrand, 
after  an  hour's  running. 

Sigurd  slackened  his  pace,  for  the 
ground  was  too  uneven  and  rough  to  keep 
it  up  longer,  and  for  a  time  they  walked 
swiftly  onward. 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


65 


"  Pray  heaven  that  we  strike  no  bog  or 
morass,"  said  Thangbrand,  "  for  if  we  do 
we  are  lost." 

"I  wonder  if  we  will  be  pursued?" 

"  If  we  are,  I  do  not  propose  to  fall  into 
their  hands  alive,"  answered  the  priest, 
stoutly.  "  They  are  evidently  some  wan- 
dering band,  who  have  been  hired  by  that 
villain  Ketil.  I'd  like  to  get  him  within 
reach  of  my  sword !" 

They  kept  onward  till  dawn,  walking  and 
running  by  turns.  As  the  gray  light  broke 
through  the  trees,  they  found  that  the  for- 
est was  thinning  out  somewhat,  and  Thang- 
brand flung  himself  down  for  a  brief  rest. 

"  I  think  we  must  be  getting  near  the 
cultivated  fields  in  that  broad  plain  we 
crossed  yesterday,"  conjectured  Sigurd. 
"  If  we  can  once  get  to  Brian  he  will  pro- 
tect us,  for  I  have  heard  that  no  one  could 
be  more  jealous  of  his  word  than  he." 

Ten  minutes  later  they  continued  their 
way.  The  sun  was  just  rising  now,  and  as 
they  stood  on  the  top  of  a  small  hill,  vain- 
ly endeavoring  to  see  some  signs  of  habi- 
tation, a  faint  yell  arose  from  the  forest 
behind  them. 

"  Come  on,  Thangbrand,"  exclaimed 
Sigurd,  breaking  into  a  run.  "  It  is  a  mat- 
ter of  speed  now." 

For  half  an  hour  they  kept  up  a  brisk 
trot,  but  could  hear  the  yells  rising  from 
time  to  time  behind  them,  each  louder  than 
the  last.  Finally  Thangbrand  stopped 
short. 

"  Go  on,  Fairhair.  I  am  clean  winded, 
and  your  life  is  worth  more  than  mine  to 
Olaf.  Do  you  go  on,  while  I  hold  them 
here  as  long  as  may  be." 

"  One  of  the  Jomsborg  oaths,"  replied 
Sigurd,  quietly,  "  is  to  never  desert  a  com- 
rade—" 

"  Out  upon  your  Jomsborg  oaths !" 
roared  Thangbrand.  "  Get  you  gone,  and 
lose  no  time !" 

"  Listen  !"  cried  Sigurd  quickly.  "  Isn't 
that  a  horn?" 


Far  off  toward  the  west  they  heard  the 
faint  notes  of  a  war-horn,  while  from  be- 
hind them  a  loud  shout  arose,  as  their  pur- 
suers came  in  sight. 

"  Hasten,  Fairhair,"  cried  the  priest,  un- 
sheathing his  sword.  "  Go  yonder  and 
bring  help  while  I  hold  them  here  1" 

Sigurd  smiled  and  unsheathed  his  own 
weapon,  as  he  looked  around. 

"  Cease  this  nonsense,"  he  said,  though 
not  without  a  thrill  at  thought  of  the  gen- 
erosity of  the  big  man.  "  Let  us  stand 
beneath  this  big  oak,  where  we  can  swing 
our  swords  without  being  struck  in  the 
back." 

They  took  position  on  either  side  of  a 
large  oak  tree,  and  five  minutes  later  the 
first  of  their  pursuers  appeared.  He  halted 
at  seeing  them,  and  sent  up  a  yell;  as  his 
comrades  came  up,  they  spread  out,  enclos- 
ing the  tree  in  a  circle. 

To  do  him  justice,  Ketil  was  brave 
enough.  When  he  appeared,  he  led  a  dozen 
men  straight  at  the  tree,  and  in  a  second 
the  two  were  fighting  furiously.  The  Irish 
crowded  around,  striking  with  their  long 
knives,  but  speedily  recoiled  before  the 
terrible  sweep  of  Thangbrand's  huge  sword, 
and  the  more  scientific,  but  no  less  deadly, 
blows  of  the  young  Jarl.  As  they  retired, 
their  chief  yelled  an  order,  and  the  arrows 
began  to  whizz  past. 

The  first  Sigurd  caught  with  his  shield, 
the  second  he  cut  in  two  as  it  flew.  A 
shout  of  amazement  went  up  from  the 
Irish  as  Thangbrand  did  the  same,  for,  un- 
acquainted as  they  were  with  the  exercises 
and  training  of  the  Norsemen,  this  skill 
seemed  little  less  than  magical.  Again  and 
again  the  two  men  repeated  the  trick,  but 
it  was  impossible  to  ward  off  more  than  one 
or  two  shafts  at  a  time,  and  soon  both 
Thangbrand  and  Sigurd  were  wounded. 
Suddenly  Ketil  sprang  at  Sigurd  with  a 
shout  of  impatience. 

The  Irish  circled  around,  watching  the 
combat  with  eager  eyes,  forgetful  of  all 


66 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


else,  while  Thangbrand  guarded  Sigurd's 
back.  Thrice  Ketil's  steel  met  that  of 
Sigurd,  then  seeing  an  opening,  the  latter 
struck;  but  his  feet  slipped  on  the  dew- 
wet  grass,  and  he  fell  headfirst. 

Thangbrand  was  instantly  bestriding  his 
body,  facing  Ketil.  At  this  the  Irish  came 
in  behind  him,  watching  eagerly  for  a 
chance  to  use  their  long  knives,  while  the 
priest  crossed  swords  with  Ketil.  Suddenly 
the  latter  threw  up  his  arms  as  something 
flew  past  Thangbrand,  and  fell  with  a  spear 
through  his  body  as  a  yell  of  terror  went 
up  from  his  band. 

Looking  about  as  he  raised  Sigurd  to  his 
feet,  Thangbrand  saw  King  Brian 
Boroimhe  behind  him,  sword  in  hand,  while 
his  men  pursued  the  fleeing  band  in  all 
directions,  cutting  them  down  without 
mercy. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

A    MISSION    FOR   THE    KING. 

THE  King  addressed  Thangbrand  in 
Latin,  which  the  priest  understood 
fairly  well. 

"  Just  in  time,  my  friends !  The  guide 
whom  I  sent  with  you  returned  late  last 
night  with  word  of  your  mishap,  and  early 
this  morning  I  sent  men  in  all  directions, 
joining  myself  in  the  search,  for  I  was 
greatly  angered  that  my  safe-conduct  had 
been  broken  in  this  wise." 

"  We  owe  you  our  lives,  my  lord,"  re- 
sponded Thangbrand  gratefully.  "  These 
men  were  in  the  pay  of  a  traitor,  whom 
your  spear  slew  before  I  had  a  chance  at 
him,  unfortunately." 

The  old  king  smiled,  not  unkindly. 
"  Strange  words  for  a  man  of  God,  sir 
priest !  But  I  see  that  your  blade  has  done 
good  service  to  Jarl  Sigurd,  and  perhaps 
in  these  times  a  priest  must  be  man  of  the 
world  as  well."  King  Brian  sighed  heavily 
as  he  looked  around,  then  said,  "  Ask  the 


Jarl  if  he  has  my  letters  safe." 

When  Thangbrand  translated,  Sigurd 
held  up  the  letters,  their  seals  unbroken ; 
and  now  the  King's  men  returned,  and  the 
party  went  to  Kells  at  once.  Here,  as 
Sigurd  was  in  haste  to  get  back  to  Dublin, 
the  King  gave  him  an  escort  of  fifty  men, 
and  they  set  out  without  delay. 

Upon  reaching  the  territory  of  Olaf, 
Sigurd  dismissed  the  Irish  and  pushed  for- 
ward; but  on  coming  within  sight  of  the 
city  he  gave  an  exclamation  of  dismay. 
Instead  of  the  King's  standard,  there 
floated  from  the  castle  a  huge  black  banner  ! 

Wondering  greatly,  they  galloped  up  to 
the  city  and  entered.  To  their  amazement, 
the  shops  were  all  closed,  and  the  whole 
city  wore  an  air  of  mourning.  Sigurd, 
without  stopping  to  ask  questions,  left 
Thangbrand  and  hurried  to  the  great  hall. 

It  was  empty,  save  for  Olaf,  who  sat  in 
the  high-seat,  his  head  bowed  in  his  hands. 
Sigurd  advanced  and  held  out  the  letters. 

"  Here,  my  lord,  is  the  reply  of  King 
Brian  Boroimhe.  Why  is  the  black 
standard  on  the  castle,  and  why  are  all  the 
shops  shut?" 

Olaf  raised  his  head  and  gazed  at  Sigurd 
with  heavy  eyes. 

"  Welcome  back,  Jarl,  in  an  evil  hour. 
Queen  Gyda  died  last  night." 

As  Sigurd  stared  at  the  King,  the  latter 
rose  slowly,  descended  from  the  high-seat, 
and  taking  Sigurd's  arm  in  his,  exclaimed: 

"  Sigurd,  come  and  talk  to  me.  I  am 
lonely,  and  the  most  wretched  of  all  men." 

They  walked  up  and  down  the  hall,  and 
Olaf  told  Sigurd  how  the  night  before  the 
Queen  had  been  seized  with  a  fatal  illness. 
Good  Bishop  Sigurd,  the  English  prelate 
who  had  come  to  Ireland  with  Olaf,  had 
done  his  best,  for  he  was  a  skillful  leech, 
but  to  no  avail. 

"  Why  should  this  evil  come  upon  me 
now?"  cried  the  King,  bitterly.  Sigurd 
said  little,  allowing  the  King's  pent-up 
grief  to  find  utterance,  then  he  said,  softly: 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


67 


"  It  is  the  will  of  God,  Olaf,  and  per- 
haps he  has  done  it  for  the  best.  May  it 
not  be  that  he  means  you  to  give  your 
whole  life  to  the  spreading  of  his  Word  in 
heathen  Norway,  and  has  sent  you  a  touch 
of  adversity  to  try  you?" 

"  Mayhap,"  responded  the  King,  "  but  it 
is  hard.  He  has  given  me  good  fortune, 
and  I  must  bear  the  bad  when  it  is  his 
will;  it  may  be  true  that  he  wishes  me  to 
devote  myself,  heart  and  soul,  to  bearing 
his  gospel  to  my  countrymen." 

The  blow  was  a  terrible  one  to  Olaf,  and 
it  was  indeed  many  a  month  ere  he  re- 
covered a  portion  of  his  former  light- 
hearted  spirits.  Two  days  later  the  Queen 
was  buried,  and  after  the  period  of  mourn- 
ing Olaf  threw  himself  into  the  work  of 
preparing  the  expedition  with  feverish 
energy. 

This  was  no  light  task,  indeed.  Olaf 
had  a  dozen  warships  in  the  harbor,  but  it 
was  impossible  to  take  so  large  a  force,  as 
men  had  to  be  left  to  defend  Dublin.  Olaf 
had  decided  to  give  up  his  Irish  land,  in 
case  of  succeeding  in  Norway,  to  his 
brother-in-law,  Olaf  Kvaran,  but  he  could 
not  leave  him  without  men. 

At  last,  after  many  consultations  with 
Sigurd  and  his  other  chiefs,  the  King  de- 
cided to  take  only  the  five  largest  ships, 
which  would  hold  about  seventy-five  men 
each.  Thorir  Klakke  had  no  inkling  that 
Olaf  knew  of  his  treachery,  and  he  advised 
the  King  to  make  a  sudden  descent  on  Nor- 
way and  to  take  Jarl  Hakon  unawares  at 
Thrandheim,  before  men  could  be  gathered. 
Thorir,  in  giving  this  advice,  thought  that 
either  he  would  be  able  to  kill  Olaf  by 
treachery  on  the  voyage,  or  else  that  the 
men  of  Hakon,  posted  at  Agdaness  in  Nor- 
way, would  remove  Olaf  before  the  plan 
could  be  accomplished. 

The  five  ships  were  fitted  up  in  the  best 
of  shape.  The  dragon  heads  were  taken 
from  their  prows,  and  in  the  place  of  these 
great  crosses  were  set  up,  for  Olaf  knew 


that  only  by  the  favor  of  God  would  he  be 
able  to  win  his  father's  kingdom.  They 
were  laden  with  all  the  wealth  that  Olaf 
had  gathered  in  his  travels  through  Russia, 
Constantinople,  and  England,  and  at 
length  the  expedition  was  ready  to  start. 

It  was  a  bright  morning  in  August  that 
the  King  went  on  board  his  ships,  followed 
by  all  his  men.  Before  doing  so,  he  called 
Alfred  and  Sigrid  to  him,  and  asked  them 
what  they  intended  to  do.  Alfred  hesi- 
tated, for  although  he  wished  to  ac- 
company Olaf,  he  did  not  forget  that  his 
father  was  in  Flanders,  and  he  did  not 
like  to  separate  from  his  sister.  Finally, 
Olaf  said,  with  a  smile: 

"  You  both  had  best  come  with  me.  I 
have  a  plan  which  I  think  will  work  out 
to  your  satisfaction;  I  will  tell  you  later 
just  what  it  is.  Put  all  your  Saxons  on 
board  the  '  Snake,'  Alfred — the  ship  that 
old  Biorn  captured  in  England,  and  sail 
with  us.  Sigurd  will  command  the 
'  Crane,'  and  when  we  get  to  the  Orkneys  I 
will  tell  you  what  I  have  in  mind." 

So,  wondering  what  the  King  meant,  the 
"  Snake "  was  added  to  the  fleet,  to 
Sigurd's  great  joy.  He  had  feared  that 
Alfred  and  his  sister  would  be  left  behind, 
and  it  was  with  no  small  satisfaction  that 
he  helped  fit  out  the  "  Snake." 

When  the  men  were  all  embarked, 
Bishop  Sigurd,  standing  in  the  prow  of 
King  Olaf's  ship,  offered  up  a  solemn 
prayer  asking  the  aid  and  the  blessing  of 
God  for  their  enterprise.  As  he  concluded, 
a  great  "  Amen  !"  rolled  over  the  sea  from 
ships  to  shore,  the  anchors  were  weighed, 
and  the  journey  was  begun  amid  a  blare  of 
war-horns  and  the  clash  of  arms. 

The  Pentland  Firth  was  not  passable,  ac- 
cording to  reports  brought  to  Olaf.  so  he 
bore  up  for  the  Orkneys,  as  had  been  his 
wish  from  the  first.  These  islands  had 
long  been  settled  by  Norsemen,  and  Jarl 
Sigurd  Lodvarson  ruled  them :  but  the  Jarl 
and  his  people  were  all  heathen,  for  no 


68' 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


missionaries  or  Christian  men  had  been 
allowed  to  settle  in  the  islands.  It  was 
Olaf's  firm  intention  to  spread  the  Word  of 
God  wherever  he  went,  and  as  the  Orkneys 
were  in  his  path,  he  decided  to  visit  Jarl 
Sigurd. 

This  was  a  dangerous  proceeding,  for 
the  Jarl  was  powerful,  and  might  have  set- 
tled the  fate  of  the  expedition  there  and 
then;  but  matters  came  out  luckily  for 
Olaf.  His  six  ships  came  to  anchor  in 
Asmundar  Bay,  in  Rognwald  Island,  and 
in  the  bay  they  found  a  single  ship  lying  at 
anchor. 

Olaf,  seeing  that  the  ship  was  a  fine  one, 
and  very  beautifully  furnished,  dispatched 
Sigurd  Fairhair  to  bring  her  commander 
on  board  his  own  ship,  hoping  to  get  news 
of  Norway.  To  his  surprise,  it  happened 
that  this  commander  was  no  other  than 
Jarl  Sigurd  Lodvarson  himself! 

Olaf  greeted  him  with  a  smile.  "  Truly, 
it  seems  that  we  have  an  abundance  of 
Sigurds  here !  Yourself,  my  own  Jarl 
Sigurd  Fairhair,  good  Bishop  Sigurd,  of 
England,  and  possibly  a  score  of  my  men, 
all  named  alike." 

The  Jarl,  not  knowing  where  King  Olaf 
was  bound  with  his  fleet,  was  somewhat 
fearful  for  his  safety,  and  when  Olaf  urged 
him  to  be  baptized,  he  refused,  saying  the 
faith  of  his  fathers  was  good  enough  for 
him.  Then  King  Olaf  arose,  holding  in  one 
hand  a  sword,  in  the  other  a  cross. 

"  Jarl,  you  hold,  as  Jarl  of  the  Orkneys, 
part  of  my  inheritance,  for  I  claim  all  the 
lands  as  mine  which  the  Kings  of  Norway 
have  possessed.  As  it  has  come  to  pass, 
by  the  will  of  God,  that  you  are  in  my 
power,  there  are  two  courses  open  to  you. 
The  one,  that  you  accept  the  true  faith, 
and  allow  yourself  to  be  baptized,  with  all 
your  subjects.  You  may  expect  to  hold 
under  me  the  Jarldom  which  you  now 
possess,  and  what  is  of  more  importance, 
you  may  hope  to  reign  for  ever  in  a 
nobler  kingdom  than  this. 


"  The  other  course,  a  very  wretched  one, 
is  that  you  die;  and  after  your  death  I 
will  pass  over  the  islands  and  bring  the 
folk  to  believe  in  the  true  God.  Now 
choose,  Jarl,  which  course  you  will  take." 

The  Jarl  hesitated;  then  he  slowly 
stretched  out  his  hand  and  took  the  cross 
from  that  of  Olaf.  This  action  was  greeted 
with  glad  shouts  from  the  crews,  and  with- 
out delay  Bishop  Sigurd  baptized  Jarl 
Sigurd. 

Then  he  swore  oaths  of  fidelity  to  King 
Olaf,  and  placed  in  the  King's  hands  his 
son,  Hundi,  who  was  also  baptized,  and 
who  accompanied  Olaf  to  Norway  as  a 
hostage. 

Next  day  Olaf  came  on  board  the 
"  Crane." 

"  Sigurd,"  he  said,  "  are  you  willing  to 
undertake  another  mission  for  me?  You 
seem  to  scrape  through  somehow,  no  matter 
what  happens,  and  as  this  one  is  of  some 
importance  I  can  think  of  no  one  better 
fitted  to  undertake  it." 

Sigurd  smiled.  "  If  I  have  scraped 
through  some  tight  places,  Olaf,  I  don't 
ascribe  it  to  my  own  conduct !  I  have  been 
fortunate  in  finding  friends,  and  for  the 
rest,  God  has  protected  me.  Now  tell  me 
what  this  mission  is." 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

AT    KING   SVEIN'S    COURT. 

ASTRID  and  Halfdan  had  a  safe  and 
quiet  voyage  home  to  Denmark,  but 
when  they  arrived  there  they  found 
that  many  changes  had  taken  place  during 
the    winter.      The    pale,    quiet,    religious 
Queen  Gunhild  had  died,  and  as  she  alone 
had  restrained  King   Svein   from  his  wild 
and  warlike  impulses,  the  King  was  gath- 
ering great  forces  for  his  descent  on  Eng- 
land. 

Astrid  took  up  her  abode  in  the  castle 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


as  formerly,  but  the  life  was  a  lonely  one. 
Her  parents  had  died  when  she  was  a 
child,  and  only  her  Uncle  Halfdan  was  near 
her.  She  disliked  King  Svein,  who,  al- 
though he  always  treated  her  well  and 
kindly,  was  a  moody  and  irritable  man, 
with  no  thought  for  anything  save  his 
selfish  ambitions.  Soon  after  Astrid's  re- 
turn he  placed  in  her  care  his  two  sons, 
Harald  and  Canute,  and  she  took  great  in- 
terest in  the  education  and  care  of  the  two 
lonely  boys,  little  thinking  that  in  after 
days  the  younger  was  to  prove  a  great  and 
worthy  king  of  England,  thanks  to  her 
early  teachings. 

So  the  summer  passed,  while  men 
assembled  and  were  sent  on  to  the  Danish 
settlements  in  the  north  of  England  to  wait 
the  arrival  of  Svein  in  the  fall.  Jarl  Half- 
dan  was  sent  in  command  of  one  of  these 
detachments,  and  after  his  departure  Astrid 
felt  her  loneliness  more  than  ever. 

One  day  King  Svein  sent  for  her. 
Wondering  at  the  summons,  Astrid  pro- 
ceeded to  the  hall,  where  she  found  the 
king  surrounded  by  his  chiefs. 

"  Lady  Astrid,"  he  said  abruptly, 
"  prepare  your  belongings  for  a  journey. 
Your  hand  has  been  asked  in  marriage 
by  the  son  of  King  Vladimir  of  Russia,  and 
needless  to  say,  I  have  accepted  the  offer, 
for  besides  being  a  great  honor,  this  will 
bring  to  my  army  a  number  of  ships  from 
Russia." 

Astrid  was  overwhelmed,  but  answered 
the  King  bravely.  "  You  have  no  right  to 
dispose  of  my  hand,  King  Svein,  in  this 
fashion  !  It  is  unjust  to  me,  for  I  am  not 
your  vassal.  My  lands  lie  in  Vendland, 
and  if  necessary  I  shall  appeal  to  King 
Burislaf  for  protection  against  this  outrage  !" 

The  King's  face  darkened.  "  You  will 
do  as  I  order!"  he  exclaimed  angrily. 
"  King  Burislaf  also  will  do  whatever  I 
order  him,  and  this  is  a  thing  unheard  of, 
that  a  girl  should  decide  her  own  mar- 
riage !" 


A  murmur  of  assent  went  up  from  the 
chiefs,  and  Astrid  gazed  hopelessly  around 
the  circle  of  fierce  faces,  finding  no  hope  in 
them.  How  she  longed  for  her  good  uncle 
to  stand  at  her  side  !  But  as  the  King  said, 
a  girl  in  those  days  could  rarely  indeed 
marry  whom  she  liked;  her  parents  or 
guardian  settled  that  without  consulting 
her,  and  Astrid  felt  that  she  was  helpless. 

"  This  is  a  noble  marriage,"  continued 
the  King,  more  calmly,  "  so  let  me  hear  no 
more  of  these  protests.  You  will  leave 
here  in  two  weeks  for  Gardarike,  Vladi- 
mir's capital,  with  a  fitting  escort." 

With  that  the  girl  was  dismissed  to  her 
apartments.  Young  Canute,  hearing  of 
the  matter,  tried  to  comfort  her,  but  the 
boy  was  of  course  as  helpless  as  she.  So, 
although  Astrid  resolved  that  the  marriage 
should  never  take  place,  even  though  she 
had  to  fly  from  home,  the  packing  of  her 
effects  proceeded. 

A  week  later,  as  she  was  sitting  sew- 
ing in  the  garden,  she  heard  a  great  noise 
from  the  harbor,  shouts  and  war-horns 
mingling  with  the  clash  of  arms.  She 
sent  Canute  to  see  what  it  was  about,  and 
presently  the  boy  came  running  back,  his 
eyes  bright  and  his  cheeks  flushed  with 
excitement. 

"  Oh,  Astrid !"  he  cried,  "  we  have  visi- 
tors !  Two  great  ships  just  sailed  into  the 
harbor,  from  far  over  the  sea — the  strang- 
est ships!  They  didn't  have  any  dragon 
in  the  bow,  but  instead  was  a  big  gilded 
cross !  All  the  men  on  board  had  shields 
with  red  crosses  on  them,  and  I  saw  them 
as  they  landed — great  warriors,  all  of 
of  them !" 

Astrid's  cheek  paled  suddenly.  What 
ships  could  these  be,  sailing  under  the 
Cross,  unless—?  Canute  continued  hastily : 

"And,  Astrid,  you  ought  to  see  the 
chiefs!  There  is  one  old  viking,  so  fierce 
and  brave-looking,  and  a  beautiful  girl 
with  bright  yellow  hair,  and  a  boy  who 
must  be  her  brother;  but  greatest  of  all 


70 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


was  a  young  man  with  hair  like  sunlight, 
streaming  over  his  shoulders,  and  a  great 
golden  helmet — 

Astrid  did  not  wait  to  hear  the  rest. 
Dropping  her  work,  she  ran  to  her  rooms, 
her  heart  beating  wildly.  Swiftly  calling 
her  women,  she  attired  herself,  and  de- 
scended to  the  hall,  which  was  empty.  She 
hastened  out,  and  leaving  the  castle,  went 
down  to  the  harbor. 

There  all  the  townfolk  and  the  men 
from  the  castle  were  crowded  about  the 
market  place,  and  as  they  made  way  for  her 
respectfully,  Astrid  saw  King  Svein  talk- 
ing to  a  number  of  people,  whom  she  could 
not  see  for  the  crowd.  As  she  made  her 
way  through  the  press,  a  well-known  voice 
fell  on  her  ear;  and  then,  with  flushed 
cheek,  she  found  herself  face  to  face  with 
Sigurd  Fairhair ! 

He  gave  a  cry  of  delight  as  he  saw  her, 
and  gripped  her  hands  until  they  hurt. 

"  Astrid !" 

"Why,  Sigurd!"  she  replied,  noting  how 
he  had  grown,  "  what  a  big  man  you  have 
become  already !  Oh,  how  glad  I  am  to  see 
you — and  how  I  need  you,  too !"  she  added 
in  a  lower  tone. 

Sigurd  gave  her  a  quick,  anxious  look, 
then  turned.  "  Here,  Alfred,  Sigrid !"  he 
shouted,  and  the  next  minute  the  two  girls 
were  in  each  other's  arms,  while  the  crowd 
looked  on,  amazed.  Sigurd  told  King  Svein 
something  of  their  tale,  then  the  king 
ordered  all  to  follow  him  to  the  castle. 

"  We  can  talk  in  peace  there,"  he  said. 
"  Do  you  come  up  at  once.  My  men  will 
attend  to  your  ships,  so  bring  your  warriors 
ashore  and  let  them  be  entertained  at  the 
barracks." 

Sigurd  left  this  to  Biorn,  and  the  four 
young  people  followed  Svein  to  the  castle, 
where  they  seated  themselves  in  the  hall, 
below  the  high-seat. 

"  Now,  how  do  you  come  to  be  here,  of 
all  places  ?"  asked  King  Svein,  who  re- 
membered Sigurd  well.  In  return  Sigurd 


told  him  about  the  rescue  of  Alfred  and 
Sigrid.  Svein  nodded. 

"  I  know  the  story.  Jarl  Alfwic  is  even 
now  with  my  army  in  England.  Go  on." 

"  King  Olaf,"  continued  Sigurd,  "  sent 
Alfred  and  his  sister  to  you  asking  that 
you  take  them  with  you  to  their  father ; 
or,  if  you  could  not  do  this,  to  see  that  they 
received  a  pilot  to  take  them  safely  to 
Flanders.  However,  since  you  are  going 
to  England  before  long  yourself,  that  is 
settled." 

"  Right  glad  will  I  be,"  replied  the  King, 
"  to  have  the  son  of  Jarl  Alfwic  with  me. 
They  will  be  safely  delivered  to  the  Jarl, 
have  no  fear." 

"  As  to  myself,"  said  Sigurd,  "  that  is 
another  matter.  King  Olaf  has  sailed  for 
Norway  to  take  the  kingdom  from  Jarl 
Hakon,  and — " 

He  was  interrupted  by  a  cry  of  amaze- 
ment from  the  Danes. 

"  What  say  you?"  shouted  Svein,  leaping 
up,  "King  Olaf  has  sailed  for  Norway? 
Skoal !  Skoal !"  The  chiefs  roundabout 
echoed  the  cheer. 

"  He  sent  me  to  you,  King  Svein,  to  ask 
that  if  possible  you  will  send  him  ships 
and  men;  or,  if  you  cannot  do  this,  that  at 
least  you  will  not  aid  Jarl  Hakon  and  Jarl 
Eirik." 

"As  to  the  first  request,  I  cannot  do 
that,"  replied  Svein,  "  for  I  need  every 
man  I  can  raise.  Be  sure,  however,  that 
Olaf  need  fear  no  attack  from  me ;  I  will  be 
joyful,  indeed,  when  the  traitor  Hakon  is 
driven  from  Norway !" 

"  That  will  be  good  news  for  Olaf,"  re- 
joined Sigurd,  "  for  an  attack  in  the  rear 
would  be  fatal.  He  has  but  five  ships,  of 
which  mine  is  one,  and  his  success  will  de- 
pend entirely  on  his  being  able  to  surprise 
Hakon." 

Sigurd  then  told  of  how  Olaf  had  Chris- 
tianized the  Orkneys,  and  how  he  had  dis- 
patched him  immediately  on  this  journey. 
Olaf  was  to  remain  three  weeks  in  the 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


71 


She  found  herself  face  to  face  with  Sigurd   Fairhair. 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


73 


islands,  baptizing  the  people,  and  had 
arranged  to  meet  Sigurd  at  Moster,  an 
island  on  the  west  coast  of  Norway,  for 
which  Olaf  would  direct  his  course. 

Sigurd  had  no  opportunity  to  speak  with 
Astrid  till  the  evening,  and  he  was  puzzled 
by  her  words  of  that  morning.  Not  till 
Alfred,  Sigrid  and  he  went  to  her  apart- 
ments in  the  evening  did  he  receive  an  ex- 
planation. Then  Astrid  told  them  about 
Svein's  plans  for  her  marriage. 

"  It  is  a  shame !"  exclaimed  Sigrid. 
"  Why,  in  England  a  girl  must  yield  obedi- 
ence to  her  father's  wishes,  but  she  is  not 
forced  into  marrying  in  this  way !" 

Sigurd  was  silent,  his  brows  knitted.  "  I 
am  in  a  bad  position,"  he  said  at  last.  "  Of 
course,  the  simplest  way  out  of  it  would  be 
for  you  to  come  on  board  the  '  Crane,'  and 
for  us  to  join  King  Olaf;  but  I  am  on  a 
mission  here  that  I  must  not  neglect.  I 
cannot  anger  Svein  against  Olaf,  as  such 
an  action  would  do;  not  that  I  care  for  my 
own  sake,  but  it  might  mean  ruin  to  my 
King." 

Alfred  agreed  with  him.  "  Yes,  you 
must  consider  your  duty  to  Olaf;  and  yet 
there  are  two  sides  to  it — " 

"  No,"  broke  in  Sigurd,  "  there  are  not. 
At  any  cost  must  Svein's  finger  be  kept  out 
of  Olaf's  pie,  for  Svein  is  liable  to  abandon 
his  English  trip  and  turn  all  his  forces 
against  Norway  in  a  sudden  fit  of  rage. 
That  would  be  fatal  to  Olaf  at  present." 

"  I  think  I  have  a  plan,"  remarked  Sigrid 
after  a  moment.  "  As  long  as  you  do  not 
appear  in  Astrid's  escape,  it  will  be  all 
right,  won't  it?" 

Sigurd  nodded. 

"  Well  then,  give  Wulf  a  few  men  and 
that  cutter  that  is  on  the  '  Snake,'  let  them 
take  Astrid  on  board,  and  wait  for  you  at 
some  place  along  the  coast.  You  must 
leave  to-morrow  or  next  day  to  rejoin  Olaf, 
so  you  can  pick  them  up  as  you  go,  and 
King  Svein  will  think  Astrid  has  fled  of  her 
own  will." 


"  Good !"  cried  Sigurd.  "  What  say  you 
to  the  plan,  Astrid?" 

"  I  think  it  is  a  good  one,  too,"  replied 
the  girl,  her  dark  eyes  sparkling,  "  but  all 
my  things  are  packed  up,  and  I  don't  want 
to  meet  King  Olaf  looking  like  this!" 

She  blushed  as  a  peal  of  laughter  went 
up  from  the  rest. 

"Never  mind,  Astrid,"  laughed  Sigrid, 
"  I  will  put  a  chest  aboard  the  '  Crane '  to- 
night; my  things  will  fit  you  pretty  well, 
and  King  Olaf  gave  me  a  whole  shipload 
of  dresses." 

"  Better  put  it  in  the  cutter,"  said  Alfred, 
"  for  when  Svein  finds  his  ward  gone,  he 
will  search  our  ships  first  thing." 

So  it  was  arranged,  that  the  next  night 
Wulf,  who  had  firmly  attached  himself  to 
the  young  Jarl,  should  wait  at  the  dock  for 
Astrid,  who  insisted  on  making  her  way 
down  to  the  harbor  alone. 


CHAPTER  XX. 

THE   KING  AND  THE   TOWEL. 

NEXT  morning  Wulf  was  instructed  in 
his  part.  He  had  become  firmly  at- 
tached to  the  young  Jarl,  and  was 
eager  for  the  business;  he  and  Biorn  had 
proved  wise  advisors  on  many  occasions. 

In  the  afternoon  Sigurd  and  Alfred  went 
hunting  with  King  Svein,  and  the  party  did 
not  return  till  long  after  nightfall.  When 
they  reached  the  castle  they  found  the 
courtyard  ablaze  with  torches. 

"What  is  this?  What  means  this  com- 
motion?" roared  the  King,  dismounting 
hastily  and  striding  forward. 

Ulf,  the  gray-headed  old  seneschal,  met 
him.  "The  Lady  Astrid  of  Vendland  has 
disappeared,  my  lord,  and  we  can  find  no 
trace  of  her  in  all  the  castle  and  town !" 

For  a  moment  the  King's  rage  was  ter- 
rible, and  he  turned  on  Sigurd,  his  face 
working  in  fury. 


74 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


"  This  is  your  doing,  Jarl !  You  have 
accepted  my  hospitality,  traitor,  and — " 

"  You  forget  yourself,  my  lord,"  inter- 
rupted Sigurd  calmly.  "  I  have  been  with 
you  all  day,  and  could  have  known  nothing 
of  this  matter.  I  do  not  blame  the  girl 
greatly,  yet  you  can  account  for  my  actions." 

"  True,"  replied  Svein,  his  anger  cooling 
under  Sigurd's  reply,  "  I  beg  your  pardon, 
Jarl,  for  my  haste.  Will  you  allow  my 
men  to  search  your  ships?  It  may  be  that 
the  girl  has  fled  on  board  one  of  them,  seek- 
ing shelter  with  the  Lady  Sigrid." 

"  Willingly,  King,"  answered  Sigurd, 
Alfred  joining  with  him. 

The  King  at  once  sent  men  in  all  direc- 
tions, mounted  and  on  foot;  but  when 
Sigurd  retired  for  the  night  nothing  had 
been  found  of  Astrid. 

In  the  morning  Sigurd  took  leave  of  King 
Svein,  who,  preoccupied  with  the  flight  of 
Astrid,  offered  no  hindrance  to  his  de- 
parture, presenting  him  with  many  gifts, 
indeed,  which  Sigurd  returned  in  kind. 

His  departure  was  the  occasion  for  a 
much  more  sincere  and  affectionate  fare- 
well between  himself  and  the  young  Sax- 
ons. Alfred  and  Sigrid  stood  on  the  deck 
of  the  "  Crane  "  till  the  last  moment,  and 
their  eyes  were  moist  as  they  said  good-by. 

"  Be  sure  to  visit  us  in  England  next 
year,"  were  Alfred's  parting  words.  "  We 
will  look  for  you  in  the  summer  at  Lin- 
coln !" 

Sigurd  promised  to  come  if  possible,  and 
so  the  three  friends  parted.  As  the  "  Crane  " 
sailed  from  the  harbor  Sigurd's  last  view 
was  of  Sigrid,  standing  on  the  forecastle 
of  the  "  Snake  "  and  waving  her  scarf  in 
farewell. 

"  Where  are  we  to  pick  up  Wulf  and 
Astrid?"  Sigurd  asked  Biorn,  after  they 
had  left  the  land  behind. 

"  About  twenty  miles  north,  Jarl.  I  sent 
a  man  with  him  who  knew  of  a  small 
river  mouth  where  they  can  lie  hid  with- 
out danger." 


Shortly  after  noon  Biorn,  taking  the 
helm,  steered  the  "  Crane  "  carefully  in  to 
the  land,  skirting  along  the  shore,  and  in 
half  an  hour  the  cutter  darted  out  as  they 
passed. 

"  Hurrah !"  shouted  Sigurd,  as  Astrid 
climbed  up  the  side.  "  You  have  done  well, 
indeed,  Wulf !  King  Svein  was  completely 
at  sea  as  to  where  his  ward  had  gone !" 

"  And  now  for  King  Olaf !"  cried  Astrid 
merrily,  as  Wulf  carried  Sigrid's  chest  into 
the  cabin  and  she  disappeared. 

It  was  many  days  before  they  saw  the 
King,  however,  for  Moster  was  far  up  the 
Norwegian  coast.  They  made  the  high 
cliffs  of  Agdir  first,  and  sailed  north  along 
the  coast;  on  the  way  they  passed  by 
Hiorunga  Bay,  but  did  not  enter,  for  the 
place  recalled  sad  thoughts  to  Sigurd's 
mind. 

"  Have  you  seen  Vagn  ?"  he  asked  Astrid, 
as  they  watched  the  Herey  Islands  speed 
by. 

"  Oh,  yes  !"  she  exclaimed.  "  How  could 
we  have  forgotten  to  speak  of  him  before ! 
He  came  to  see  me  last  spring — and  just 
think,  Sigurd  !  He  is  married  !" 

Sigurd  gave  an  exclamation  of  surprise, 
and  Astrid  continued. 

"  Yes,  he  married  a  girl  in  Norway,  and 
brought  her  back  to  Denmark.  He  would 
have  nothing  to  do  with  Jarl  Sigvald  on 
his  return,  calling  him  a  coward  and  a  trai- 
tor, and  the  Jarl  is  remaining  close  in  Joms- 
borg.  Vagn  himself  is  in  the  south  of  Den- 
mark, where  his  father  owned  some  cas- 
tles." 

Sigurd  was  surprised  to  hear  that  his 
cousin  was  married,  and  he  firmly  resolved 
to  visit  him  as  soon  as  the  result  of  Olaf's 
expedition  was  decided.  The  next  morning 
they  arrived  at  Moster,  and  before  the  fish- 
ing village  found  the  four  ships  of  Olaf, 
which  had  arrived  a  few  days  previously. 

Olaf  welcomed  Astrid  back  with  much 
merriment.  "  You  seem  to  come  back  to 
your  friend  OH,"  he  laughed,  "  and  this  tim« 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


75 


Oli  is  not  going  to  let  you  go  away  so 
soon  !" 

Sigurd  told  him  the  story  of  Astrid's 
flight,  and  the  King  commended  his  Jarl 
for  acting  so  wisely.  "  If  Svein  had  come 
on  us  now,  Fairhair,  it  would  have  been  all 
over  with  us;  as  it  is,  you  did  right  in  get- 
ting the  maid  away  without  trouble,  and  I 
am  heartily  glad  that  you  did  so." 

Olaf  stopped  at  Moster  for  two  days,  and 
as  he  had  first  landed  in  Norway  there, 
he  marked  out  a  space  on  the  ground,  gave 
Thangbrand  plenty  of  money  and  materials, 
and  left  him  there  to  build  the  first  church 
in  the  country. 

After  this  Olaf  sailed  north  day  and 
night  as  the  wind  favored  him,  following 
the  land,  but  keeping  to  the  open  sea,  out- 
side the  islands  which  were  strewn  thickly 
along  the  coast.  When  the  wind  was  con- 
trary he  anchored  at  the  islands  farthest  out 
to  sea,  and  did  not  touch  the  mainland,  for 
fear  that  Jarl  Hakon  would  receive  news 
of  his  coming.  At  last,  just  at  evening, 
they  reached  Agdaness,  at  the  entrance  to 
the  Firth  of  Thrandheim. 

After  the  ships  were  anchored  and  the 
awnings  raised,  King  Olaf  visited  the 
"  Crane." 

"  Now,  Sigurd,"  said  he,  "  I  wish  your 
advice.  Thorir  Klakke  is  on  board  my  ship, 
and  you  know  how  his  plans  were  revealed 
to  me  by  my  brothers,  whom  he  attempted 
to  bribe.  Well,  Jarl  Hakon's  men  are  hid- 
den in  the  forest  yonder,  and  are  doubtless 
awaiting  us;  Thorir  is  to  take  me  ashore 
alone,  as  if  to  arrange  some  plan  of  action, 
and  there  I  am  to  be  killed.  Now,  what 
would  you  suggest  doing?" 

Thinking  it  over,  Sigurd  replied,  "  It 
seems  to  me,  Olaf,  as  that  it  would  be  fit- 
ting to  let  the  traitor  fall  into  his  own  trap. 
Put  a  score  of  men  ashore  to-night,  let  them 
hide  near  by,  and  when  Hakon's  men  appear 
let  our  men  charge  them  and  put  them  to 
flight,  after  which  Thorir  should  be  exe- 
cuted." 


"  That  is  a  right  good  scheme."  answered 
the  King.  "  I  do  not  want  to  take  life,  God 
knows,  yet  such  criminals  must  be  pun- 
ished; and  the  most  fitting  punishment  for 
this  man  is  death.  So  be  it." 

Early  the  next  morning  Sigurd,  watching 
from  the  "  Crane,"  saw  Thorir  and  the  King 
go  ashore  alone.  They  walked  along  the 
shore,  then  Thorir  held  up  his  glove,  as  if 
signaling.  The  next  minute  a  number  of 
men  broke  from  the  trees,  but  as  they  did 
so,  more  men  rose  up  from  among  the 
bowlders  on  the  shore  and  put  them  to 
flight.  Two  of  these  latter  fell  on  Thorir, 
while  the  King  watched,  and  the  unfor- 
tunate man  expiated  his  treachery  with  his 
life. 

After  this,  Olaf,  walking  down  to  the 
water,  shouted  to  Sigurd  to  come  ashore, 
which  the  young  Jarl  did. 

"  Come,  Fairhair,  let  us  walk  up  and  see 
if  we  can  find  a  farm,  where  we  can  learn 
tidings  of  Jarl  Hakon.  If  he  is  in  Thrand- 
heim we  must  fall  upon  him  to-day  or  to- 
morrow at  latest,  for  these  men  will  bear  the 
news  of  our  coming." 

They  walked  up  the  hill,  leaving  their 
men  behind,  and  presently  came  to  a  little 
farmhouse,  with  a  pasture  behind  it  where 
some  cows  were  grazing.  Walking  up  to 
the  door,  they  saw  an  old  woman  inside, 
and  Olaf  addressed  her. 

"  Good  dame,  may  we  have  a  drink  of 
fresh  milk?  We  are  two  travelers,  and 
will  pay  for  what  we  take." 

"Welcome,  friends!"  replied  the  woman. 
"  Enter  and  I  will  get  some  milk  and 
bread." 

While  she  was  away,  Olaf  and  Sigurd 
washed  their  hands  at  the  well  beside  the 
house,  and  entering  again,  the  King  took 
up  a  towel  that  was  lying  on  the  table,  and 
dried  his  hands  on  it.  At  that  moment  the 
woman  returned,  and  snatched  the  towel 
from  his  hand. 

"  It  is  easy  to  see  that  you  have  not 
been  brought  up  very  well,  and  have  been 


76 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


taught  little  good,"  she  cried  angrily. 
"  Know  you  not  that  it  is  wasteful  to  wet 
all  the  towel  at  once?" 

Olaf  responded,  soberly,  "  Well,  well, 
mayhap  I  shall  still  rise  in  the  world  so 
high  that  I  may  dry  my  hands  in  the  mid- 
dle of  the  towel !"  Sigurd  was  bursting 
with  laughter,  and  at  this  reply  he  could 
hold  in  no  longer,  and  the  woman  looked 
furiously  at  him. 

They  drank  their  milk,  and  the  coin  that 
Olaf  handed  the  woman  somewhat  ap- 
peased her.  "  Tell  me,"  he  asked,  "  do  you 
know  where  Jarl  Hakon  is?" 

"  Last  night  he  was  in  hiding,  my  son 
told  me." 

"  In  hiding !  What  mean  you  ?"  ex- 
claimed the  King. 

"  Why,  whence  come  you  that  you  know 
not?  Within  the  last  few  months  Hakon 
has  become  so  cruel  and  tyrannical  that 
there  is  no  living  with  him;  two  days  ago 
his  exactions  in  Gauladale  caused  the  bond- 
ers to  rise  against  him,  under  Orm  Lugg. 
They  separated  the  Jarl  from  his  ships  and 
drove  him  into  the  forest,  no  one  knows 
where.  My  son  told  me  last  night,  ere  he 
crossed  the  Firth  to  join  the  bonders,  that 
they  were  going  to  look  for  him  at  the 
home  of  Thora  of  Rimul,  a  great  lady  who 
is  a  relative  of  the  Jarls." 

"  Well,  well !"  said  the  King,  as  they 
hastily  returned  to  the  ships.  "  Think  you 
not  that  heaven  is  with  me,  Fairhair? 
Here  I  come  to  Norway  at  the  very  mo- 
ment when  Hakon  has  goaded  the  bonders 
to  rise  in  revolt;  I  find  him  cut  off  from 
his  men  and  ships,  driven  a  fugitive  into 
the  forests,  mayhap  slain  by  this  time ! 
Come,  let  us  make  all  haste  to  cross  the 
Firth  and  arrive  at  Gauladale." 

So,  hastily  shouting  out  the  news  to  the 
other  ships  as  they  went  on  board,  the 
prows  were  turned  across  the  Firth  of 
Thrandheim,  toward  the  district  of  Gaula- 
dale. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 

THE  DEATH   OF    HAKON. 

AS  THEY  left  the  shelter  of  the  bay 
and  drew  across  the  Firth,  the  nar- 
row entrance  of  which  was  only 
two  or  three  miles  in  width,  three  ships 
were  seen  sailing  along  the  opposite  shore. 
Olaf  steered  directly  for  them,  for  with- 
out doubt  these  were  ships  of  Hakons ; 
but  as  the  fleets  neared  each  other,  the 
'three  ships,  evidently  taking  Olaf's  ships 
for  foes,  turned  toward  the  shore. 

The  King  dashed  forward,  coming  up 
with  the  three  ships  just  as  they  ran  up 
on  a  sandbar.  Their  crews  leaped  over- 
board, wading  and  swimming  to  shore,  and 
directly  in  front  of  Olaf's  ship  was  seen 
a  large,  handsome  man,  swimming.  Olaf 
shouted,  but  he  paid  no  heed ;  so,  seizing 
the  tiller,  the  King  flung  it  at  him.  The 
heavy  missle  struck  him  on  the  head,  and 
he  sank. 

Then  Olaf's  men,  leaping  overboard, 
pursued  the  flying  men,  slaying  some  and 
capturing  others.  As  soon  as  the  captives 
were  brought  on  board  the  King  inter- 
rogated them. 

It  seemed  that  the  man  whom  Olaf  had 
slain  with  the  tiller  was  Erland,  a  son  of 
Jarl  Hakon,  and  that  these  ships  were 
going  to  the  Jarl's  aid.  Further,  the 
prisoners  said  that  Jarl  Hakon's  forces 
were  utterly  dispersed,  that  the  bonders 
were  in  revolt  throughout  the  whole  dis- 
trict, and  that  none  knew  where  the  Jarl 
was  in  hiding. 

King  Olaf  at  once  landed  some  of  his 
men  with  orders  to  tell  everyone  who  he 
was,  why  he  had  come,  and  to  bid  all  the 
bonders  meet  him  the  next  day  in  Gaula- 
dale. Then  the  five  ships  were  steered 
east,  going  up  the  Firth,  and  that  after- 
noon the  King  was  landed  at  Gauladale. 

He  found  a  great  meeting  of  the  chief 
bonders  and  leaders  of  the  revolt  against 
Hakon  in  progress,  and  as  soon  as  these 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


77 


found  who  he  was,  they  greeted  him  with 
tears  of  joy,  and  welcomed  him  most 
heartily.  Olaf  brought  his  chiefs,  Sigurd 
among  them,  to  the  assembly,  and  when 
all  were  seated  one  of  the  older  leaders 
of  the  peasants  rose  and  addressed  him. 

"  Olaf,  Jarl  Eirik  will  demand  stern 
payment  of  this  attack  on  his  father, 
Hakon,  when  he  hears  of  it;  nevertheless, 
we  are  determined  that  Jarl  Hakon  shall 
die,  for  his  life  has  been  altogether  evil. 
You,  however,  are  of  the  race  of  our  old 
Kings,  from  Harald  Fairhair  to  your 
father,  Triggve,  and  in  the  name  of  this 
assembly  I  ask  you  to  become  King  over 
us,  at  least  until  an  assembly  of  the  people 
can  be  held  at  Thrandheim  to  elect  you  in 
regular  form." 

This  caused  the  men  of  Olaf  much  joy, 
and  the  King  accepted  the  offer  of  leader- 
ship which  they  made  him.  The  same 
evening  they  traveled  up  the  valley  to 
Rimul,  where  the  Lady  Thora  lived.  It 
was  here  that  the  bonders  thought  Jarl 
Hakon  was  in  hiding,  but  some  distance  up 
the  valley,  beside  'the  river  was  found  a 
cloak,  which  was  recognized  as  Jarl 
Hakon's. 

"  He  has  perished  in  the  river !"  cried 
many  voices,  and  this  opinion  was  strength- 
ened by  finding  the  body  of  Hakon's  horse 
farther  down,  on  a  sandbank.  But  as 
everyone  was  discussing  this,  an  old  bonder 
came  up  to  Olaf. 

"  Olaf,"  he  remarked,  "  you  know  well 
how  cunning  the  Jarl  is,  and  how  skilled 
he  is  in  tricks.  A  man  of  his  nature  does 
not  get  carried  away  by  a  river,  however 
swift;  can  you  not  see  that  this  is  but  a 
trick  to  make  us  cease  the  search  and  dis- 
band?" 

"  That  is  so,"  replied  Sigurd  at  once. 
"  I  believe  the  man  is  right,  King." 

Others  assented  to  this  opinion  also,  and 
the  small  army  pushed  on  to  Rimul.  By 
torchlight  they  made  a  thorough  search 
of  the  homestead  of  Lady  Thora,  but  with- 


out avail;  so  King  Olaf,  standing  on  a 
large  stone  near  the  barn,  cried  out: 

"  Men,  we  have  searched  without  avail 
for  Jarl  Hakon ;  at  this  time  we  can  do  no 
more.  But  know,  that  with  fitting  gift  and 
payment  I  will  reward  whoever  shall  slay 
the  Jarl  and  bring  me  his  head." 

With  that  they  left  the  homestead,  and 
proceeded  to  Ladi,  where  they  remained 
for  the  night.  This  was  a  very  large  farm 
and  village,  belonging  to  the  Kings  of 
Norway,  and  here  Olaf  took  up  temporary 
quarters.  The  men  were  next  morning 
landed  from  the  ships,  the  bonders  were 
levied,  and  word  was  sent  throughout  the 
whole  country  that  King  Olaf,  son  of  King 
Triggve,  had  arrived  to  take  the  rule  from 
the  hands  of  Hakon,  and  that  a  General 
Assembly  of  the  People  was  to  meet  at 
once  at  Thrandheim. 

These  things,  however,  were  not  all  done 
in  a  day.  The  very  next  afternoon,  after 
reaching  Ladi,  word  was  brought  to  King 
Olaf  that  a  man  was  inquiring  for  him, 
having  a  large  package.  King  Olaf  and 
Sigurd  went  to  the  door  of  the  farmhouse, 
and  saw  an  ill-favored  man  wearing  the 
collar  of  a  thrall,  or  slave. 

"What  do  you  want  of  me?"  inquired 
the  King. 

For  answer  the  man  opened  his  pack- 
age and  showed  a  human  head.  Sigurd 
could  not  repress  a  shudder,  and  he 
turned  away;  the  head  was  that  of  Jarl 
Hakon  of  Norway. 

Olaf  called  his  men  at  once,  and  the 
thrall  told  his  story.  He  was  the  tooth- 
thrall  of  Hakon,  the  slave,  who,  according 
to  custom,  had  been  given  the  Jarl  when  he 
cut  his  first  teeth;  he  had  fled  with  Hakon 
from  the  bonders,  and  the  Lady  Thora  had 
made  for  them  a  sure  hiding-place  in  a 
cave  beneath  the  pigsty,  in  the  very  yard 
where  Olaf  had  offered  a  reward  for 
Hakon's  head. 

"What  led  you  to  betray  the  Jarl?" 
asked  Olaf,  angrily. 


78 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


"  Chiefly  for  the  reward  you  promised, 
King,  for  we  could  hear  your  voice  dis- 
tinctly. So  I  slew  him  as  he  slept  and 
brought  his  head  to  you  for  the  promised 
reward." 

"  Seize  him,  men !"  cried  Olaf,  his  eyes 
blazing  with  anger  as  he  pointed  to  the 
thrall.  "  I  will  keep  the  promise  which  I 
made,  to  give  you  a  fit  reward,  and  it  will 
keep  those  who  come  after  us  from  betray- 
ing their  lords  !  You  dog !  You  were  the 
servant  of  a  wicked  man,  but  he  was  your 
master  and  a  good  one  to  you.  and  you 
were  bound  to  him  by  oaths  the  most 
sacred.  Your  reward  shall  be  a  fitting  one 
indeed;  take  him  out  and  behead  him, 
men!" 

When  this  was  done,  King  Olaf  took  the 
thrall's  head,  together  with  that  of  Hakon, 
and  sailing  out  to  the  island  of  Nidarholm, 
which  was  used  as  a  place  of  execution  for 
evildoers,  the  two  heads  were  placed  on 
the  gallows.  That  night  King  Olaf  gath- 
ered his  leaders  in  the  farmhouse  at  Ladi. 

"  My  friends,"  he  said,  "  Jarl  Hakon  is 
dead,  and  I  doubt  if  Jarl  Eirik  will  dare 
to  attack  us.  The  General  Assemb'ly  will 
be  held  soon,  and  I  trust  that  the  people 
will  take  me  for  their  king.  It  seems  to 
me  that  only  by  the  aid  of  God  was  the 
mighty  Hakon  overthrown  so  easily;  more- 
over, the  time  is  come  when  idolatry  and 
heathen  worship  in  Norway  must  give  way 
to  the  Holy  Truth.  You  have  come  hither 
from  Ireland  with  me,  and  are  you  now 
willing  to  give  your  lives,  if  need  be,  to 
spread  the  Word  of  God?" 

"  Aye !"  shouted  all,  and  after  a  council 
it  was  decided  that  as  soon  as  Olaf  had 
been  chosen  king  the  first  steps  should 
be  taken  to  stamp  out  the  worship  of  Thor 
and  Odin  at  the  great  temple  in  Thrand- 
heim.  Sigurd  remembered  his  adventure 
with  Vagn  in  that  temple,  and  he  felt  a 
thrill  at  thought  of  planting  the  Cross  in 
place  of  the  great  golden  statue  of  Thor; 
for  the  words  of  the  King  had  fired  all  his 


chiefs,  and  Bishop  Sigurd  also  had  spoken 
at  length. 

They  abode  quietly  at  Ladi  for  two  or 
three  weeks,  Astrid  taking  up  her  quarters 
in  the  big  farmhouse.  There  was  nothing 
to  do  save  to  wait  till  the  bonders  met  in 
General  Assembly,  and  for  this  reason  also 
King  Olaf  waited  before  tearing  down  the 
great  temple  to  Odin  at  Ladi.  It  would 
not  be  wise  to  anger  the  bonders  before 
being  elected;  afterwards,  when  he  was 
the  rightful  King,  it  would  be  different. 

Finally  word  arrived  that  the  delegates 
to  the  Assembly  had  met  from  all  eight 
districts  of  Norway,  so  Olaf  and  his  men 
traveled  up  to  Thrandheim,  at  the  head  of 
the  Firth.  Olaf  was  pretty  sure  of  election, 
for  while  he  dwelt  at  Ladi  most  of  the  great 
men  of  the  country  had  visited  him,  and 
his  handsome  presence  and  kingly  mien 
had  made  a  very  favorable  impression ; 
moreover,  he  was  well  known  by  reputation 
as  one  of  the  greatest  warriors  of  his  time. 

Arrived  at  Thrandheim,  Olaf,  Sigurd, 
Astrid  and  the  others  of  the  King's  party 
were  given  apartments  in  the  palace  of 
Jarl  Hakon,  and  two  mornings  later  they 
took  their  way  to  the  Assembly.  Here  an 
immense  crowd  was  assembled,  from  the 
whole  Thrandheim  district,  and  as  soon  as 
the  Assembly  had  been  constituted,  King 
Olaf  stood  up  in  sight  of  all,  his  red-gold 
hair  flying  in  the  breeze,  the  sun  streaming 
from  his  golden  armor  and  scarlet  cloak. 

"  It  is  known  to  all  men  here  assembled 
that  I  have  offered  myself  to  be  King  over 
you.  You  must  expect  the  sternest  treat- 
ment by  Jarl  Eirik  for  the  attack  on  his 
father,  unless  you  obtain  protection ;  on 
the  other  hand,  I  have  a  difficult  task  be- 
fore me  in  obtaining  possession  of  my 
father's  realm,  after  being  so  long  absent." 

Olaf  gave  a  brief  account  of  his  life  and 
adventures,  from  his  boyhood  up  to  his  dis- 
covery of  Thorir  Klakke's  treachery,  his 
coming  to  Norway,  and  the  death  of 
Hakon,  and  concluded  with : 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


79 


"  I  believe  that  there  is  no  man  in  Nor- 
way who  by  legal  right  and  descent  has  so 
much  right  to  the  crown  as  I.  But  I  must 
be  made  King  by  you,  the  Assembly  of  the 
People,  and  if  you  do  so  I  will  protect  you 
and  rule  you  according  to  the  ancient  laws 
of  Norway." 

The  tale  of  his  exile  and  sufferings 
greatly  moved  the  people,  who  were  already 
predisposed  in  his  favor.  As  he  sat  down, 
half  the  delegates  leaped  to  their  feet. 

"  Skoal !  Olaf  Triggveson,  skoal !  We 
will  have  you  to  be  our  King,  and  none 
other !  Skoal !" 

A  blare  of  horns  mingled  with  shouts 
rent  the  air,  and  Sigurd,  behind  Olaf,  set 
his  great  standard  flapping  in  the  breeze. 
A  silence  fell  over  the  people  as  they  saw 
the  Cross,  but  only  for  a  moment;  again 
the  shout  arose,  pealing  across  the  town 
and  the  bay  and  echoing  back  from  hill  to 
hill  behind  them: 

"  Skoal  to  King  Olaf !     Skoal !" 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

THE    SACRIFICE  TO  THOR. 

THUS  was  Olaf  Triggveson  chosen  by 
the  General  Assembly  to  be  King 
over  all  Norway,  and  the  rule  of  the 
land  was  made  over  to  him  in  accordance 
with  the  old  laws,  by  the  officers  of  the 
people.  The  bonders  swore  to  be  faithful 
to  him,  to  support  him  while  he  won  the 
whole  kingdom,  and  to  help  him  to  hold  it; 
Olaf  on  his  part  promised  to  observe  the 
laws  and  rights  of  the  people,  and  to  de- 
fend it  from  all  invaders. 

These  ceremonies  occupied  the  better 
part  of  the  day,  and  it  was  sunset  before 
Sigurd  and  Astrid,  who  had  watched  the 
ceremony,  returned  to  the  hall.  They  saw 
nothing  of  Olaf  for  several  days,  for  he 
was  very  busy  with  the  various  leaders  who 
flocked  to  his  banner,  and  he  was  raising 


men  and  sending  messages  to  all  quarters 
of  Norway  with  news  of  his  election. 

Soon,  however,  news  arrived  that  the 
levies  were  not  needed,  for  Jarl  Eirik  and 
his  brother  Svein  had  fled  to  Sweden  as 
soon  as  the  news  of  their  father's  death 
arrived.  The  whole  country  yielded  to 
Olaf's  rule,  glad  once  more  to  have  a  king 
of  the  royal  line  of  rulers,  and  glad  to  get 
rid  of  Hakon,  who  to  this  day  is  known  as 
"  Hakon  the  Bad." 

King  Olaf  was  eager  to  preach  the  gos- 
pel to  his  people,  but  Sigurd,  his  namesake 
the  Bishop,  and  the  other  chiefs  saw  that 
Olaf  must  first  make  his  hold  on  the  coun- 
try firmer,  for  they  foresaw  that  when  the 
people  found  that  Olaf  was  intending  to 
overturn  the  old  faith,  there  would  be 
tumults  and  revolts.  The  King,  however, 
yielded  only  in  part  to  them;  and  refusing 
to  dwell  in  Thrandheim,  where  the  great 
temple  of  Thor  was  situated,  began  the 
building  of  a  second  town,  Nidaros,  a  few 
miles  distant.  So  the  autumn  and  early 
winter  passed. 

Nevertheless,  the  news  spread  that  Olaf 
was  no  follower  of  the  old  gods,  and  grave 
disturbances  took  place  throughout  the 
country,  for  the  bonders  drew  away  from 
the  new  King  when  they  found  that  he  was 
preaching  a  new  faith  to  them.  Then  one 
day  came  the  news  that  at  many  of  the 
larger  temples  great  meetings  of  the  bond- 
ers had  taken  place,  with  sacrifices  to  the 
old  gods,  and  there  the  bonders  had  solemn- 
ly vowed  that  they  would  not  allow  Olaf 
to  preach  the  "  White  Christ "  in  Norway. 

Now  all  agreed  that  it  was  indeed  time 
to  act,  unless  the  kingdom  was  to  be  en- 
dangered. The  heart  of  the  country  was 
the  district  around  Thrandheim,  where  the 
land  was  most  thickly  populated,  and 
where  the  capital  lay;  so  Olaf  realized  that 
if  he  once  established  Christianity  here,  it 
would  not  be  long  before  the  rest  of  Nor- 
way gave  in. 

With  this  object  he  called  another  Gen- 


80 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


eral  Assembly  at  Frosta,  near  the  capital; 
but  as  the  message  went  forth,  the  bonders 
seized  the  messengers,  and  substituted  a 
war-arrow,  so  that  all  the  chiefs  and  great 
leaders  assembled  with  a  huge  host,  armed 
and  ready  for  war. 

Olaf,  who  came  to  the  Assembly  with 
only  Sigurd  and  a  score  of  men,  saw  that 
he  was  taken  in  a  trap ;  however,  on  the 
first  day  of  the  meeting  he  conciliated 
the  Assembly,  although  when  he  mentioned 
Christ  several  of  the  leaders  arose  and 
forbade  him  to  speak  on  religious  subjects 
on  that  day. 

Sigurd  saw  that  the  bonders  were  in 
a  bad  mood,  and  that  a  spark  might. inflame 
them;  so  that  night,  as  he  and  King  Olaf 
sat  in  their  tent,  he  said: 

"  Olaf,  I  have  a  plan  which  I  think  will 
save  us  all  from  further  trouble." 

"Then,  by  St.  Michael,  let  me  have  it!" 
cried  Olaf,  "  for  I  am  at  my  wits'  end  for 
want  of  one !" 

So  Sigurd  talked  long  with  the  King 
that  evening.  The  next  morning,  when 
the  Assembly  opened,  Olaf  arose,  and 
after  a  short  speech  said: 

"  Let  us  preserve  the  compact  that  we 
made  before,  to  strengthen  and  uphold  each 
other.  To  this  end  I  will  attend  your  great 
sacrifice  two  weeks  hence  at  the  temple 
in  Thrandheim,  and  after  this  we  will  take 
counsel  together  concerning  the  faith  that 
will  be  held,  and  we  will  agree  to  hold  to 
whatever  faith  we  decide  upon." 

At  this  the  bonders  gave  a  great  shout 
of  joy,  thinking  that  King  Olaf  was  yield- 
ing, and  the  other  matters  for  which  the 
Assembly  had  been  called  passed  off  with- 
out trouble. 

When  Olaf  returned  to  his  new  town  of 
Nidaros  a  number  of  men  from  Iceland  re- 
ceived baptism,  shortly  after  Yuletide. 
Many  traders  and  others  who  were  in  the 
new  city  of  Nidaros,  remained  through  the 
winter  at  Olaf's  court,  and  most  of  these 
were  also  baptized  in  the  end. 


For  the  next  two  weeks  both  Sigurd  and 
the  King  were  busy  perfecting  Sigurd's 
plan.  The  chief  opponent  of  Christianity 
among  the  bonders  was  Ironbeard,  a  very 
powerful  chief  who  was  also  priest  at  Moeri, 
a  town  near  Thrandheim.  The  winter  sac- 
rifice was  to  be  held  at  the  great  temple  in 
Moeri,  and  if  Sigurd's  plan  went  well,  all 
resistance  to  Christianity  in  the  district 
would  be  destroyed  at  one  blow. 

Invitations  were  sent  out  to  all  the  chief 
men  of  the  bonders,  to  a  feast  to  be  held 
at  Nidaros  three  days  before  the  winter 
sacrifice.  The  greatest  chiefs  and  leaders 
of  the  Thrandheim  districts  were  invited, 
and  all  accepted,  save  Ironbeard  and  one  or 
two  others. 

On  the  morning  bidden,  the  invited 
chiefs  streamed  into  town,  on  foot,  on 
horseback,  and  even  on  skis.  Many  came 
over  the  ice  from  across  the  bay,  and  by 
next  morning  the  new  city  was  filled  with 
men,  as  each  chief  brought  a  party  with 
him.  Early  in  the  morning  Olaf  and  his 
court  attended  service  in  the  new  church, 
all  the  visitors  refusing  to  watch  the  serv- 
ice. 

Immediately  afterward  Sigurd  led  fifty 
men  to  the  harbor.  There  they  put  on 
skates,  and  the  young  Jarl  led  them  to 
Ladi,  which  was  only  three  miles  across 
the  ice,  though  more  by  land. 

Removing  their  skates,  Sigurd  and  his 
men  tramped  up  from  the  shore  to  the 
temple  which  stood  on  the  hill,  and  raising 
his  axe,  Sigurd  struck  the  door.  In  five 
minutes  it  was  broken  down,  while  the  few 
priests  who  lived  near  by  stood  watching 
helplessly. 

Carrying  out  all  the  images,  Sigurd  piled 
them  in  the  show  ana  set  fire  to  them  as  an 
object  lesson  to  the  watching  priests  and 
bonders  that  their  gods  were  powerless. 
The  temple  was  then  stripped  of  its  valu- 
ables and  the  building  itself  burned.  When 
this  was  done,  Sigurd  and  his  men  made  a 
cross  out  of  two  beams  of  wood,  and  this 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


81 


This  cross  he  planted  over  the  ruins  o]  the  idols. 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


83 


he  planted  in  the  snow  over  the  ruins  of 
the  idols. 

Then,  seeing  the  bonders  gathering  fast, 
he  stepped  out  and  addressed  them : 

"  Friends,  we  are  here  by  command  of 
the  King,  and  you  have  to-day  seen  how 
powerless  your  gods  are  before  the  true 
God.  As  you  know,  your  chiefs  are  now  in 
Nidaros ;  when  they  return  they  will  be 
Christian  men,  no  longer  heathen." 

With  this  Sigurd  and  his  men,  laden  with 
the  spoil  of  the  temple,  returned  to  Nidaros. 
At  the  harbor  mouth  a  man  met  them,  for 
it  was  noontime. 

"  Hasten,  Jarl !  The  Assembly  has  just 
been  called !"  he  cried  to  Sigurd.  "  King 
Olaf  posted  me  here  to  bid  you  hasten  to 
the  hall." 

Sigurd  hurried  on  to  the  palace,  bidding 
his  men  wait  in  the  outer  rooms  till  he  blew 
his  horn.  Then  he  made  his  way  to  the 
hall,  entering  it  just  as  the  Assembly  was 
opened  by  the  King. 

"  Chiefs  and  bonders,"  said  Olaf.  look- 
ing sternly  around  on  the  two  score  great 
leaders  who  sat  below  his  high-seat.  "  I  do 
not  forget  that  you  chose  me  to  be  your 
King,  and  gave  me  this  realm  of  Norway ; 
but  some  two  weeks  ago  I  called  a  General 
Assembly  of  the  people,  and  there  you  and 
others  refused  to  hear  me  preach  the  gospel 
of  Christ,  and  only  by  promising  to  attend 
the  winter  sacrifice  did  I  escape  injury  at 
your  hands. 

"  Now  you  and  all  men  know  that  I  have 
in  many  places  shamed  the  false  gods,  burnt 
their  images  and  temples,  and  in  their  stead 
have  erected  the  Cross  of  the  true  God. 
But  I  am  conscious  of  the  oath  which  I 
swore  to  you  at  that  Assembly,  and  there- 
fore I  propose  to  sacrifice  to  your  gods  the 
greatest  and  highest  sacrifice  that  man  may 
offer,  namely,  human  life." 

A  little  murmur  of  joy  ran  around  the 
hall  as  Olaf  paused.  On  great  occasions 
the  Norsemen  used  to  offer  as  the  most 
acceptable  sacrifice  a  number  of  slaves  or 


criminals,  condemned  to  death.  At  the 
next  words  of  Olaf,  the  joyous  murmur 
ceased. 

"  I  do  not  believe  that  thralls  or  male- 
factors should  be  offered  to  the  gods;  in- 
stead, they  should  delight  in  the  blood  of 
noble  men,  great  chiefs,  powerful  bonders. 
Since  you  have  refused  to  release  me  from 
my  oath,  I  propose  to  sacrifice  this  sort  of 
men,  for  we  must  do  our  best  to  appease 
the  gods,  that  they  may  favor  us.  Am  I 
right?" 

As  the  King  paused  again,  a  doubtful 
murmur  of  assent  rose  up,  and  the  men,  not 
quite  sure  of  Olaf's  meaning,  fixed  their 
eyes  on  the  King,  who  stood,  handsome  and 
erect,  by  his  throne. 

"  Therefore,"  he  continued,  "  I  will  offer 
to  your  gods  the  greatest  sacrifice  that 
Norway  has  ever  known.  You  must  be 
eager  to  receive  from  them  the  reward  of 
your  service  and  past  offerings,  and  for 
the  purpose  of  this  offering  I  shall  select 
you,  Orm  Lugg,  you,  Asbiorn  of  Orness. 
you,  Stirkar  of  Gimsa,  you,  Kar  of  Gryting, 
and  I  will  sacrifice  you  upon  the  high  altar 
of  Thor  at  Thrandeim.  And  after  this,  I 
shall  select  six  others,  the  highest  and 
worthiest  men  of  this  district  from  among 
you,  and  they  shall  be  sacrificed  likewise, 
that  the  gods  may  send  us  fruitful  seasons 
and  peace." 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 

HOW   THE   CHIEFS   WERE    BAPTIZED. 

FOR  a  moment  the  chiefs  stared  at  the 
King,  incredulous  and  amazed.    Then, 
as   they   caught   the   meaning  of   his 
ironic  speech,  the  four  men  he  had  named 
leaped   to   their    feet,   and   an   angry   roar 
went   up    from   all.      Olaf's   uplifted   hand 
stilled  the  murmur. 

"  Wait !  You  do  not  seem  so  eager  for 
the  companionship  of  your  gods;  can  it  be 
that  you  doubt  their  power  to  save  you? 


84 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


If  that  is  really  the  case,  and  you  wish 
to  release  me  from  that  oath  of  mine,  I 
will  be  right  glad  to  have  you  all  baptized, 
and  believe  in  the  mighty,  gentle  and  kind 
God  whom  I  and  my  men  serve." 

At  these  words  Sigurd  blew  his  horn, 
and  the  doors  in  the  side  of  the  hall  flew 
open.  His  men  brought  in  the  spoils  of  the 
Ladi  temple  and  laid  them  at  Olaf's  feet, 
while  other  armed  men  filed  silently  into 
the  room. 

"  Here,"  exclaimed  Olaf,  pointing  to  the 
temple  utensils  and  trappings,  "  you  see 
how  powerless  your  gods  are  to  save  their 
belongings !  Now  think  it  over,  while  my 
men  watch  the  doors ;  I  will  return  in  a  few 
minutes." 

With  these  words  he  left  the  hall,  fol- 
lowed by  Sigurd.  Outside  the  door  he 
gripped  the  boy's  arm  joyfully,  and  was 
about  to  speak  when  an  indignant  voice 
broke  on  their  ears : 

"What  is  this  tale  I  hear,  King  Olaf?" 

Looking  up  they  saw  before  them  the 
old  English  Bishop,  Sigurd,  clad  in  his 
vestments.  His  face  was  stern  and  cold 
as  Olaf  bowed  to  him. 

"Is  this  tale  true?  That  you  hold  the 
Thrandheim  chiefs  in  the  great  hall,  offer- 
ing them  their  choice  of  baptism  or  death? 
Answer  me !" 

Astounded,  the  King  gazed  at  the  Bishop, 
then  after  a  moment  his  eyes  fell. 

"  Why,  Bishop,  it  is  true,  certainly ! 
What  mean  you  ?" 

The  old  man's  eyes  flashed.  "Think 
you  that  this  is  the  way  to  spread  the  gospel 
of  Christ?  Is  baptism  a  thing  to  be  forced 
on  men,  or  a  thing  which  they  must  choose 
willingly?  Better  lose  this  kingdom  of 
yours  and  flee  back  over  the  ocean  again 
than  to  do  this  thing,  Olaf  Triggveson !" 

At  this  the  boy  spoke  out.  "  Bishop,  it 
it  my  fault,  for  I  suggested  the  plan;  but 
why  is  it  so  bad?  Did  not  the  chiefs  en- 
trap Olaf  a  week  or  two  ago?" 

Bishop  Sigurd  turned  on  him.     "  What 


of  that?  Do  as  you  will  with  the  bodies 
of  these  men,  Olaf,  but  force  not  their 
souls !  Let  them  come  to  Christ  willingly." 
His  voice  softened.  "  I  know  that  you  both 
are  only  overzealous ;  but  believe  me,  King 
and  Jarl,  this  is  not  Christianity.  Christ 
said,  '  Come  unto  me ' ;  think  you  he  would 
have  men  driven  to  him  with  whips  and 
swords,  who  died  to  save  men?" 

Olaf  bent  his  head,  and  Sigurd  dropped 
on  his  knees.  "  Pardon,  Bishop !  I  had 
not  thought  of  it  that  way;  I  see  how 
wrong  it  was  now !" 

The  Bishop  put  his  hand  on  Sigurd's 
head.  "And  you,  Olaf?  Do  you  not  see 
that  I  am  right?  Must  you  be  led  by  this 
boy?" 

Olaf,  fixing  his  keen  eyes  on  the  old  man, 
nodded  slowly.  "  I  see,  Bishop,  and  I  will 
obey  your  unspoken  thought." 

He  turned  slowly,  and  Sigurd  followed 
him  to  the  door  of  the  great  hall.  As  they 
entered  there  was  a  hush,  and  Olaf  curtly 
bade  his  men  leave  the  building,  waiting  in 
silence  as  they  filed  out. 

Then,  ascending  the  high-seat,  he  said 
bitterly : 

"  Chiefs,  I  came  among  you  preaching 
the  Word  of  God,  the  gospel  of  peace  and 
salvation;  but  my  own  acts  have  been  as 
those  of  a  pagan  and  worse.  Small  wonder 
that  you  refused  to  accept  my  faith  !  Too 
late  I  see  that  I  have  done  ill  by  you;  now 
I  stand  ready  to  repair  my  faults,  and  to 
act  as  a  true  Christian.  Go  in  peace;  those 
of  you  who  wish  to  accept  Christianity  will 
be  welcomed.  If  it  is  your  wish  that  a 
heathen  King  rule  over  you,  I  will  return 
whence  I  came,  and  will  bring  no  fire  and 
sword  into  the  land." 

The  chiefs  gazed  in  amazement  at  the 
King,  and  Orn  Lugg,  one  of  the  greatest 
spoke  out: 

"  Is  this  truth,  King?  Are  we  free  to  go 
to  our  homes?" 

"  Yes,"  said  Olaf,  a  flush  mounting  to  his 
brow.  "  I  have  proved  myself  a  poor 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


85 


Christian,  friends,  but  forgive  me  for  this 
time;  go,  and  whatever  is  your  will  I  shall 
abide  by  it." 

One  by  one,  silent,  incredulous,  the  chiefs 
left  the  hall,  and  Sigurd  alone  remained 
with  the  King.  Then  the  boy,  grasping 
Olaf's  hand,  cried  with  tears  in  his  eyes: 

"  Olaf,  we  have  been  wrong,  but  how 
you  must  suffer !  Will  you  really  go  back 
to  'Ireland  if  the  chiefs  refuse  to  accept 
the  gospel?" 

"  Yes,  my  friend,"  and  Olaf's  tone  was 
very  low  and  soft.  "  The  good  Bishop  yon- 
der showed  me  more  in  that  minute  than  I 
can  tell  you.  I  have  been  proud,  Sigurd, 
and  my  pride  is  shattered ;  the  Hammer 
of  Thor  is  not  like  Christ's  Cross.  I 
thought  to  use  the  Cross  like  a  weapon,  like 
Thor  uses  his  Hammer;  but  the  Cross  is  a 
symbol,  not  of  pride  and  might,  but  of  gen- 
tleness, of  pity,  of  humility.  Yes,  my — 

Suddenly  the  doors  opened,  and  in  came 
the  chiefs,  to  the  King's  amazement.  Their 
faces  were  very  changed  now;  the  fierce- 
ness, the  resistance,  seemed  to  have  given 
way  to  some  new  emotion. 

"  King  Olaf,"  said  Orm,  the  spokesman, 
"we  found  it  as  you  said;  the  palace  is 
unguarded,  the  streets  are  clear.  Oh,  King, 
I  have  a  hard  thing  to  say,  but  mayhap 
you  will  understand  !  Listen. 

"  We  bonders  have  in  truth  resisted  your 
faith  because,  as  you  said  just  now,  you 
preached  one  thing  to  us,  and  you  acted 
another  thing.  We  have  resisted,  not  be- 
cause we  love  the  old  gods,  but  because  we 
could  not  see  wherein  the  White  Christ  was 
better." 

Orm  paused,  fixing  his  eyes  on  the 
King's.  "  But  to-day,  King  Olaf,  you  have 
shown  us  a  new  thing.  We  have  not 
known  you  long,  yet  we  have  found  in  you 
a  strong  man,  a  proud  man,  a  man  used  to 
ruling  the  wills  of  others,  and  for  this  we 
have  rejoiced  in  a  worthy  King.  To-day, 
Olaf,  we  have  found  that  there  was  one 
thing  stronger  than  these,  a  thing  able  to 


overcome  all  your  strength,  pride — even 
your  will;  and  because  this  is  so,  we  freely 
accept  from  your  hand  the  Cross  of  Christ" 

For  a  moment  Olaf  gazed  at  the  men 
around  him,  unable  to  speak.  Then,  the 
tears  flowing  down  his  cheeks,  he  pressed 
their  hands,  one  by  one,  and  said : 

"  My  friends,  this  is  a  victory  where  I 
had  found  a  defeat.  I  cannot  tell  you  what 
it  means  to  me,  but  I  think  that  none  of 
us  will  forget  this  day.  Jarl  Sigurd  and  I 
have  to-day  learned  a  lesson  from  you  and 
from  ourselves;  pray  God  we  may  never 
have  to  learn  it  over  again !" 

Then  Sigurd  summoned  the  Bishop,  tell- 
ing him  what  had  happened  on  the  way, 
and  without  delay  the  chiefs  were  baptized 
in  Olaf's  new  church,  together  with  their 
men.  That  night  Olaf  and  Sigurd  sat  in 
Astrid's  chamber,  talking  over  the  events 
of  the  day  until  late. 

King  Olaf  had  given  Astrid  part  of  Jarl 
Hakon's  forfeited  estates,  to  compensate 
her  for  those  she  possessed  in  Vendland,  so 
that  she  might  be  able  to  live  as  became 
her  dignity;  further,  he  constituted  himself 
her  ward,  although  with  the  laughing  dec- 
laration that  he  would  run  the  risk  of  forc- 
ing her  to  marry  against  her  will.  He  had 
also  promised  to  give  Sigurd  an  earldom, 
as  soon  as  he  had  put  the  country  into  some 
kind  of  order. 

"What  are  now  your  plans,  my  lord?" 
asked  the  girl,  that  same  night.  Olaf  shook 
his  head. 

"  Truly,  Astrid,  I  know  not.  Practically 
all  of  the  greater  chiefs  from  the  Thrand- 
heim  districts  were  baptized  to-day,  and  I 
think  that  the  bond  established  between  us 
will  never  be  broken.  Ironbeard  alone 
holds  out;  I  am  strongly  minded  to  visit 
him  at  once,  during  the  winter  sacrifice, 
and  try  to  win  him  over.  To-morrow, 
Sigurd,  we  will  go  to  Thrandheim  and  de- 
molish the  great  temple  there." 

For  a  minute  Sigurd  looked  at  Olaf.  then 
the  latter  smiled.  "  No,  Sigurd,  I  have 


86 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


learned  my  lesson.  There  will  be  no  blood- 
shed, either  there  or  at  the  winter  sac- 
rifice, if  I  can  help  it.  But  the  greatest 
chiefs  have  been  baptized;  now  it  is  essen- 
tial that  Ironbeard  be  either  forced  to  ac- 
cept my  rule  or  leave  the  country." 

So,  without  the  least  opposition,  Olaf  and 
Sigurd  burned  the  old  temple  of  the  war-god 
the  very  next  day.  Many  of  the  chiefs  so 
recently  baptized  showed  their  sincerity  by 
joining  Olaf  or  sending  men  to  his  aid; 
and  the  idols  were  taken  out  before  all  the 
people,  and  burned.  Sigurd  longed  for  Vagn 
to  be  there,  as  he  remembered  their  adven- 
ture with  Jarl  Hakon;  but  his  cousin  was 
far  away  to  the  south. 

The  work  was  finished  by  midday,  and 
the  party  returned  to  Nidaros.  The  sudden 
conversion  of  their  greatest  chiefs  seemed 
to  have  demoralized  the  bonders,  for  no 
longer  were  threats  heard  against  Olaf,  but 
instead,  many  of  them  came  to  Nidaros  and 
were  baptized  by  the  good  Bishop. 

The  day  after  the  destruction  of  the 
Thrandheim  temple,  Olaf  prepared  to  go 
to  Moeri,  where  the  winter  sacrifice  was 
held.  He  took  all  his  men,  sailing  up 
Thrandheim  Firth  with  his  largest  ships, 
and  came  to  Moeri  the  day  of  the  sacrifice. 

The  King  sent  Sigurd  ashore,  demanding 
that  the  people  first  hold  an  Assembly. 
Fairhair  found  a  great  multitude  assembled 
from  all  the  countryside,  with  Ironbeard 
and  his  men  all  present.  They  at  once 
agreed  to  Olaf's  demand,  so  the  King 
landed  with  his  men,  and  the  Assembly  was 
constituted  on  the  plain  before  the  temple. 

When  the  noise  and  talking  of  the  open- 
ing had  subsided,  Olaf  arose  in  his  seat  and 
told  the  bonders  what  had  taken  place  in 
his  hall  at  Nidaros,  told  them  how  he  had 
found  his  mistake,  and  would  no  longer  try 
to  force  a  religion  on  them  that  they  did 
not  want. 

Sigurd  could  see  a  change  sweep  over 
the  faces  of  the  bonders  before  him,  and 
they  glanced  at  each  other  and  began 


whispering.  At  this,  however,  Ironbeard 
leaped  to  his  feet — an  immense  man,  wear- 
ing the  robes  of  a  priest  of  Thor,  and  with 
an  iron-gray  beard  that  swept  over  his  chest. 
He  lifted  his  hand  and  began  to  speak, 
slowly  and  with  great  dignity. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 
OLAF'S  ATONEMENT. 

44T/7"ING  OLAF,"  rang  out  the  priest's 
1^^  deep  voice,  "  we  are  unwilling 
that  you  should  violate  our  re- 
ligion. The  wish  of  us  all  is  that  you 
should  offer  sacrifice  as  other  kings  before 
you  have  done,  and  even  as  Jarl  Hakon  did. 
When  King  Hakon,  foster  son  of  King 
Athelstan  of  England,  wished  to  proclaim 
the  White  Christ,  he  found  the  bonders  too 
strong  for  him,  and  he  yielded  to  the  old 
faith.  The  only  proper  plan  for  you  is  to 
do  likewise,  for  our  minds  have  not  changed 
since  that  Assembly  wherein  you  promised 
to  visit  this  temple  at  this  time." 

Ironbeard  sat  down,  and  his  speech  was 
loudly  applauded  by  the  bonders  who  sat 
around,  and  by  the  great  crowd  without. 
Olaf  flushed  at  the  chiefs  proud  demands, 
but  controlling  his  temper,  he  rose. 

"  My  friends,  I  promised  to  visit  your 
temple,  and  I  shall  do  so  now,  before  the 
sacrifices.  The  Assembly  is  closed." 

With  this  he  motioned  to  Sigurd,  and, 
followed  by  his  men,  who  had  laid  aside 
their  arms,  he  walked  to  the  door  of  the 
temple.  Olaf  held  in  his  hand  a  gold- 
mounted  staff  of  heavy  wood,  and  as  they 
entered  he  said  to  Sigurd: 

"  Jarl,  do  just  as  I  do,  and  act  quickly." 

Inside  they  saw  many  images  around  the 
temple,  and  occupying  the  place  of  honor 
was  a  large  idol,  heavily  adorned  with  gold 
and  silver.  The  temple  was  now  full  of 
Olaf's  men,  while  Ironbeard  and1  the  bonders 
stood  in  the  doorway,  watching  him. 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


87 


Without  another  word  the  King  walked 
up  to  the  large  idol,  and  raising  his  heavy 
staff,  struck  it.  The  idol  toppled  over,  fell 
to  the  stone  floor,  and  broke  in  two  parts. 
At  the  same  instant  Sigurd  and  his  men 
rushed  at  the  other  images  and  swept  them 
from  their  pedestals. 

A  loud  cry  of  horror  arose  from  the 
bonders,  and  Ironbeard,  seizing  a  spear, 
poised  it,  in  the  act  of  hurling  it  at  the 
King.  As  he  did  so,  one  of  Olaf's  men, 
who  was  outside,  pierced  him  with  an 
arrow,  and  he  fell  at  the  temple  threshold. 

The  bonders  drew  back,  in  terror,  and 
the  King  turned  angrily. 

"  Who  fired  that  arrow  ?"  he  shouted.  The 
man  who  had  done  so  stepped  to  the  door. 

"  It  was  I,  King  Olaf,  and  I  did  it  to  save 
your  life.  Ironbeard  had  poised  a  spear  at 
you — see,  it  is  even  now  in  his  hand !" 

Olaf  looked  at  the  fallen  leader,  and  saw 
that  the  man  spoke  truly.  "  Order  the 
Assembly  called,"  he  said  to  Sigurd.  "  Bid 
them  have  no  fear." 

When  the  people  had  taken  their  places 
again,  Olaf  came  out  of  the  temple  and  ad- 
dressed them  from  the  steps : 

"  Friends  and  bonders,  I  did  not  come 
here  to  shed  blood,  and  I  am  bitterly 
grieved  that  Ironbeard  drew  his  fate  on 
himself.  As  I  told  you  a  little  time  ago, 
I  will  compel  no  man  to  leave  his  faith;  I 
have  discovered  the  wickedness  of  that 
course.  But  a  few  days  ago  your  other  chiefs, 
some  of  whom  stand  at  my  side,  accepted 
from  my  hands  the  Cross  of  Christ,  and 
now  I  offer  it  to  you  also. 

"  You  have  seen  how  your  gods  have 
fallen  and  broken.  Where  is  their  power, 
think  you?  The  true  God  has  protected 
me,  has  brought  me  to  this  kingdom  and 
given  it  into  my  hand  without  a  struggle, 
and  whether  you  will  it  or  not,  his  faith 
will  prevail  in  Norway  before  many  more 
years  have  passed." 

The  King  paused,  and  one  of  the  bonders 
arose  to  reply. 


"Oh,  King,  your  words  to-day  have 
fallen  pleasantly  on  our  ears,  and  we  easily 
perceive  that  you  have  truth  and  justice 
in  your  heart.  We  see,  too,  that  the  gods 
are  dead,  and  that  they  have  no  power  be- 
fore the  Cross  of  the  White  Christ.  But, 
King  Olaf,  the  slaying  of  Ironbeard  was  an 
evil  deed,  whether  you  intended  it  or  not, 
and  before  we  say  more  on  this  subject  we 
would  like  to  know  whether  you  will  punish 
his  murderer." 

The  bonder  sat  down  amid  a  faint  mur- 
mur of  applause,  and  the  Assembly  fixed 
their  eyes  on  Olaf.  For  a  moment  the  King 
sat  in  silence,  and  it  was  evident  that  he 
was  struggling  with  himself;  then  his  face 
cleared. 

"  My  people,  I  will  not  punish  the  man, 
for  he  saved  my  life.  Wait !  I  am  not 
through.  Are  there  any  relatives  of  Iron- 
beard  present  ?" 

Two  men  stood  up.  "  We  are  distant 
relatives  of  his,  oh,  King,  but  he  has  left 
no  others  to  mourn  him  save  a  single 
daughter." 

King  Olaf  took  off  his  helm.  "  My  peo- 
ple, this  is  a  lawful  Assembly,  able  to  give 
judgment  and  to  punish  criminals,  with 
power  to  inflict  penalty  for  offenses.  I 
appoint  you  two  bonders  judges,  and  I  take 
upon  my  own  head  the  blood  of  Ironbeard. 
Whatever  you  shall  think  right,  I  will  agree 
to,  in  compensation  for  his  death.  Whether 
you  demand  my  life,  or  my  exile,  or  a  scat 
in  money,  these  will  I  give,  and  you  shall 
fear  no  punishment  from  my  men." 

At  these  words  a  silence  fell  on  the 
host,  and  Sigurd  gazed  at  Olaf  in  love  and 
admiration.  Truly,  old  Bishop  Sigurd  had 
not  spoken  in  vain!  A  murmur  of  appre- 
ciation of  Olaf's  generous  offer  passed  from 
mouth  to  mouth,  and  presently  the  two 
relatives  of  Ironbeard,  after  conferring  to- 
gether, stood  up. 

"  King  Olaf,  by  these  words  of  yours  you 
have  indeed  shamed  us,  who  came  to  this 
Assembly  with  arms,  and  with  war  in  our 


88 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


hearts.  It  is  a  new  departure  in  Norway, 
that  her  Kings  should  offer  themselves 
under  the  laws  like  common  men;  and  yet 
it  seems  not  unfair  to  us  that  you  should 
do  so.  The  laws  declare  that  for  the  shed- 
ding of  blood  the  relatives  of  the  dead  man 
may  claim  the  life  of  the  slayer,  or  they 
may  claim  a  scat  in  lands  or  goods.  Now, 
King  Olaf,  Ironbeard  has  left  no  family 
save  a  daughter,  who  has  no  lack  of  wealth 
and  is  of  good  family.  We,  therefore,  her 
relatives,  lay  this  judgment  upon  you:  that 
you  make  her  your  lawful  wife  and  be- 
stow upon  her  lands  befitting  her  position 
as  Queen." 

The  King's  men  uttered  a  growl  of  pro- 
test, even  Sigurd  looking  somewhat  blank, 
for  the  King  had  thought  of  marrying  one 
of  the  daughters  of  the  Swedish  King,  to 
make  an  alliance  between  the  two  nations. 
Olaf,  however,  checked  the  murmur  with 
a  gesture,  and  replied  to  "the  bonders : 

"  My  friends,  this  is  a  lawful  judgment, 
and  I  accept  it  with  good  will.  I  will  ex- 
pect you  two  men  to  look  to  it  that  the  maid 
is  sent  to  .Nidaros  before  Eastertide,  at 
which  time  I  shall  marry  her  and  make  her 
the  Queen  of  this  land.  It  is  the  least  I  can 
do,  methinks,  after  my  men  have  killed  her 
father  and  left  her  alone  in  the  world. 
Should  this  plan  not  meet  with  her  consent, 
I  will  expect  you  to  appoint  other  penalty, 
which  I  will  fulfill  most  faithfully,  and  this 
I  swear  on  the  Cross." 

Olaf  sat  down  amid  a  shout  of  approval 
and  joy  from  the  bonders,  and  a  dozen 
men  rose  at  once  to  speak.  Making  one 
of  their  number  spokesman,  he  addressed 
the  King. 

•"  My  lord,  when  I  left  home  it  was  my 
firm  intention  to  resist  your  faith  to  the  last 
drop  of  my  blood;  but  now  I  am  proud  to 
take  baptism  from  your  hands,  and  to 
swear  anew  my  allegiance  to  you." 

Olaf  started  up  in  surprise,  and  one  by 
one  the  other  bonders  rose  and  declared 
their  intention  to  be  baptized.  Then  Olaf 


sent  for  Bishop  Sigurd,  whom  he  had  left 
at  the  ships,  fearing  that  Ironbeard  might 
attack  him,  and  turned  to  the  bonders. 

"  My  people,  nothing  that  you  could  do 
would  give  me  more  pleasure  than  this 
thing.  It  is  the  dearest  wish  of  my  heart 
that  this  land  of  Norway  should  become 
Christian,  and  once  you  and  the  other  lead- 
ers of  Thrandheim  and  the  districts  around 
have  received  baptism,  we  will  meet  with 
little  opposition  from  the  rest  of  the  land. 
In  pledge  of  your  earnestness  I  ask  that 
you  complete  the  destruction  of  this  your 
temple  to  the  old  gods,  and  on  its  site  I 
will  erect  at  my  own  expense  a  church  to 
the  true  God." 

Shouting  and  clashing  their  arms,  the 
bonders  sprang  up  without  an  instant's 
hesitation.  They  ran  to  the  temple,  carried 
out  the  broken  images,  and  piled  them  in 
the  snow,  while  others  stripped  the  temple 
of  its  furnishings  and  set  fire  to  it.  As  the 
pile  of  idols  broke  into  flame,  old  Bishop 
Sigurd  arrived  from  the  ships. 

He  had  been  told  the  whole  story  on  the 
way  up  the  hill,  and  he  gripped  Olaf's  hand 
silently  but  heartily  as  the  King  met  him. 
At  once  the  work  of  baptism  was  begun, 
Sigurd  and  the  rest  of  the  King's  men  tak- 
ing part  in  the  service,  and  standing  as  god- 
fathers to  the  new  converts. 

When  this  was  finished  the  afternoon 
was  nearly  spent,  and  after  arranging  with 
the  leaders  of  the  people  for  the  building 
of  a  church,  for  the  burial  of  Ironbeard, 
and  for  the  sending  of  his  daughter  Gud- 
run  to  Nidaros  at  Easter,  Olaf's  men  em- 
barked, and  the  King  sailed  back  down  the 
Firth  to  Nidaros. 

A  few  days  before  this  the  Firth  had 
opened,  for  although  it  was  still  winter,  the 
weather  had  warmed  somewhat,  and  a  chan- 
nel had  been  made  from  above  Moeri  to 
the  open  sea.  When  the  fleet  came  to  the 
harbor  that  night,  they  found  the  town 
alight  with  torches,  and  lying  in  the  harbor 
were  several  newly  arrived  ships,  or  rather 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


89 


cutters,  for  they  were  small. 

"I  wonder  what  this  means?"  said  the 
King,  as  they  drew  into  the  anchorage.  "  I 
had  no  tidings  of  visitors,  when  we  left  the 
city  yesterday,  and  it  is  strange  that  the 
town  is  all  alight !" 

So  before  the  ships  had  come  to  anchor, 
Olaf  and  Sigurd  leaped  into  a  small  boat 
and  were  rowed  ashore.  Their  ships  had 
been  seen  entering,  for  great  fires  were  lit 
on  either  side  of  the  harbor,  making  every- 
thing plain  to  the  sight,  and  a  crowd  of  men 
met  them  as  they  landed. 

"  What  is  all  this  excitement  about  ?"  de- 
manded the  King,  looking  around  in  won- 
der. 

A  confused  talking  answered  him. 
"  Here,  one  at  a  time !"  shouted  Olaf,  and 
one  of  the  men  stepped  to  his  side. 

"  We  have  been  driven  from  home,  my 
lord  King,  and  we  come  from  the  north. 
There  two  chiefs,  Raud  the  Strong  and 
Thori  Hart,  have  revolted  against  the 
White  Christ,  have  gathered  a  fleet,  and  are 
sailing  against  you.  They  are  preparing  to 
restore  the  temples  of  Thor  and  Odin  and 
to  burn  the  churches  you  have  built;  we, 
who  are  Christians,  have  barely  escaped 
with  our  lives,  fleeing  in  our  small  boats. 
The  heathen  will  enter  the  Firth  in  a  few 
days,  unless. you  meet  them  first!" 


CHAPTER  XXV. 

THE   WRESTLING    MATCH. 

OLAF  at  once  went  to  the  great  hall, 
and  there  the  fugitives  came  before 
him  and  told  their  story.     The  two 
Northern  chieftains  had  taken  advantage  of 
the  unexampled  spell  of  warm  weather  to 
raise  a  fleet  and  sail  down  the  coast,  think- 
ing to  come  upon  the  King  just  as  he  had 
come  upon  Jarl  Hakon. 

Olaf  quickly  consulted  with  Sigurd,  the 
Bishop,   and   his  other   leaders,   and   their 


opinion  was  that  not  a  minute  was  to  be 
lost.  If  the  King  embarked  that  night 
and  sailed  out  of  the  Firth,  he  would 
reach  the  entrance  by  morning,  and  could 
wait  for  the  heathen  fleet  there. 

The  King  agreed  to  this  plan,  and  at 
once  sent  word  to  his  men  to  return  on 
board  the  ships.  The  Thrandheim  chiefs 
now  proved  their  loyalty  by  refusing  to  re- 
turn to  their  homes. 

"  No,  King,"  said  they,  "  you  have  dealt 
with  us  fairly  and  honorably,  and  we  are 
sensible  of  it.  We  and  our  men  will  be  of 
use  if  it  comes  to  a  battle,  and  the  enemy 
may  lose  heart  when  they  see  us,  for  evi- 
dently they  count  on  our  forces  joining 
them.  So  set  up  our  standards  on  your 
ships,  and  we  will  gladly  accompany  you." 

At  this  decision  the  King  was  overjoyed, 
for  with  these  men  were  several  hundred 
warriors  in  all,  who  had  gathered  at  the 
Moeri  Assembly.  So  a  few  hours  later 
Olaf  and  Sigurd  left  Nidaros  again,  with  a 
dozen  ships,  while  more  would  follow  as 
soon  as  they  had  been  taken  off  their  win- 
ter dry-docks. 

The  ships  rowed  down  the  Firth  all 
night,  while  Olaf  and  Sigurd  rested.  The 
day  had  been  a  terribly  hard  one  on  both, 
and  they  were  glad  to  get  what  sleep  they 
could  before  meeting  the  advancing  foes. 

The  week  of  warm  weather  seemed  a 
wonderful  thing  to  all  the  men,  and  not  a 
few  ascribed  it  to  the  favor  of  heaven 
upon  Olaf.  It  was  only  barely  past  Yule- 
tide,  and  although  no  one  expected  the 
warm  weather  to  last,  few  of  the  oldest 
men  could'  remember  a  winter  when 
Thrandheim  Firth  had  remained  open,  or 
had  opened  before  April. 

By  morning  they  were  outside  the  cape 
of  Agdaness,  where  the  traitor  Thorkel  had 
been  executed.  The  King  ordered  the  ships 
to  be  hove  to  here,  in  order  to  wait  for  the 
six  other  ships  which  were  following  from 
Nidaros.  All  day  long  they  waited,  seeing 
nothing  of  the  rebels.  Two  or  three  small 


90 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


ships,  bearing  more  fugitives,  came  down 
the  coast,  and  gave  Olaf  the  news  that 
Raud  and  Thori  were  only  fifteen  miles  to 
the  north,  that  they  had  landed  at  Theks- 
dale,  and  were  summoning  men  to  join 
them  from  all  the  country. 

That  afternoon  the  reinforcements  came 
up  from  Nidaros,  and  the  King  held  a  coun- 
cil on  his  ship  the  "  Crane." 

"  First,"  he  said,  "  I  am  resolved  that  if 
it  can  possibly  be  avoided  there  shall  be  no 
bloodshed  in  this  matter.  Now  let  me  have 
your  council  on  how  we  shall  act  to  gain 
these  rebels  over,  if  that  can  be  done." 

Sigurd  spoke  first.  "  It  may  be  that  you 
did  not  note  it,  King  Olaf,  but  old  Biorn, 
my  forecastle  man,  is  strongly  of  the  opin- 
ion that  to-night  a  heavy  frost  will  set  in. 
This  warm  weather  has  not  been  natural  at 
all ;  even  this  afternoon  the  sun  has  been 
growing  somewhat  colder. 

"  Now,  if  a  frost  returns  to-night,  it  will 
be  no  light  one,  and  Biorn  says  that  the 
Firth  will  again  be  closed  to  us.  In  this 
case,  it  seems  to  me  that  any  ships  lying 
along  the  shore  would  be  frozen  fast,  espe- 
cially if  they  were  in  such  a  narrow  bay  as 
that  at  Theksdale.  I  think  that  Raud  and 
Thori  will  give  little  heed  to  their  ships, 
drawing  them  on  shore  carelessly,  or  per- 
haps anchoring  them  near  by;  and  if  this 
is  the  case,  and  we  come  upon  them  sud- 
denly, they  will  probably  be  so  disheartened 
at  the  loss  of  their  ships,  and  at  being  left 
so  far  from  home  without  means  of  retreat, 
that  they  will  give  in." 

A  cry  of  delight  broke  from  the  King  and 
the  others.  "  That  is  the  very  solution  of 
it !"  exclaimed  Olaf.  "  But — it  depends  on 
whether  or  not  a  frost  sets  in.  In  any  case 
we  will  leave  the  land,  so  as  not  to  be 
frozen  in  ourselves." 

The  chiefs  separated  to  their  respective 
vessels,  and  all  sailed  out  two  or  three  miles 
to  sea,  where  they  lay  tossing  quietly.  At 
sunset  Bishop  Sigurd,  who  was  aboard  the 
"  Crane,"  conducted  a  solemn  service,  dur- 


ing which  he  offered  a  solemn  prayer  that 
God  would  favor  their  enterprise ;  as  the 
men  on  all  the  ships  joined  in  the  responses, 
it  seemed  to  Sigurd  Fairhair  that  never  had 
he  witnessed  a  more  impressive  sight  than 
this.  Eighteen  ships,  all  crowded  with 
men,  a  large  portion  of  whom  had  only  a 
few  days  before  been  worshipers  of  idols, 
lay  grouped  together  in  the  sunset  glow, 
while  from  them  arose  a  devout  and  heart- 
felt prayer  to  the  White  Christ. 

No  sooner  had  the  sun  set  and  darkness 
fallen  upon  the  ocean,  than  the  night  turned 
bitterly  cold.  Many  of  the  men,  not  ex- 
pecting this,  had  left  off  their  furs  and 
cloaks,  so  that  the  others  divided  theirs 
among  all.  In  some  of  the  ships  were  bales 
of  merchandise,  and  at  the  King's  order 
these  were  opened  by  torchlight  and  all  the 
men  without  cloaks  were  furnished  with 
them. 

By  midnight  it  was  evident  that  the  in- 
tense cold  would  close  the  Firth,  and  as 
Sigurd  had  foreseen,  would  also  hold  the 
enemy  helpless.  Amid  a  shout  of  rejoicing 
from  all  the  men,  the  prows  were  turned 
north,  and  the  ships  rowed  swiftly  toward 
Theksdale,  for  there  was  not  a  breath  of 
wind,  and  every  minute  the  cold  seemed  to 
increase. 

With  sunrise  the  pilots  announced  that 
they  were  not  far  from  their  goal,  and  an 
hour  later  they  rounded  the  islands  outside 
Theksdale  Bay.  There,  however,  they  were 
stopped  by  a  ragged  line  of  ice,  nearly  a 
foot  thick,  which  had  formed  during  the 
night. 

In  all  haste,  for  as  yet  they  had  not  come 
around  the  headland  into  the  bay  itself,  the 
crews  disembarked  without  mishap,  and 
gained  the  shore,  leaving  men  on  board  the 
ships  to  keep  them  safe.  They  made  their 
way,  under  guidance  of  men  who  knew  the 
coast,  across  the  headland ;  and  there  before 
them  lay  the  army  of  revolt,  their  fleet  fast- 
bound  in  fetters  of  ice  along  the  shore ! 

"  Come,"  exclaimed  Olaf  to  his  nearest 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


91 


leaders,  "  we  must  lose  no  time,  for,  see, 
they  are  cutting  the  ships  out  of  the  ice !" 

So,  leading  the  way,  he  dashed  over  the 
rocks  of  the  shore,  and  as  the  first  shouts  of 
alarm  went  up  from  the  heathen  army,  Olaf 
and  part  of  his  men  stood  between  them  and 
their  ships,  while  over  the  brow  of  the  hill 
poured  the  remainder  of  his  forces. 

The  rebel  camp  seethed  and  boiled  with 
men,  but  seeing  that  Olaf  made  no  move  to 
attack  them,  their  haste  quieted  somewhat, 
and  in  a  few  minutes  two  well-appareled 
chiefs  left  the  tents  and  with  a  dozen  men 
approached  the  King. 

"  Have  we  safe  conduct,  King  Olaf?" 
shouted  one. 

"  Have  no  fear,"  replied  Olaf,  "  come  in 
peace." 

As  they  approached,  men  who  knew  them 
whispered  to  the  King  that  these  were  Raud 
the  Strong  and  Thori  Hart.  Both  were  of 
lofty  stature  and  magnificently  built,  with 
strong,  vigorous  features.  They  stopped 
a  dozen  paces  from  the  King. 

"  From  your  appearance  you  are  Olaf 
Triggveson,"  said  one.  "  I  am  Raud  the 
Strong,  and  this  is  Thori  Hart.  Have  you 
come  in  peace  or  in  war,  oh,  King?" 

A  smile  ran  around  Olaf's  men,  and  he 
himself  laughed  outright. 

"  That  is  a  strange  question,  Raud,  when 
you  have  attacked  my  people  and  declared 
your  intention  of  driving  me  from  the 
land !" 

The  other  two  flushed,  and  Raud's  face 
darkened.  "  You  have  caught  me,"  he  cried 
angrily,  "  by  fault  of  the  Ice  King,  where 
my  men  can  ill  defend  themselves,  and  I  see 
that  you  have  many  more  warriors  than  I 
looked  for;  yet  you  will  not  find  me  the  last 
to  cross  swords  with  you,  Olaf !" 

"  Hold,  Raud,"  answered  Olaf.  "  I  mean 
not  to  attack  you.  Now  see,  I  have  your 
ships  yonder,  I  have  a  much  larger  force 
than  you,  and  yet  if  you  will  not  yield  will- 
ingly to  me  you  shall  depart  in  peace  to 
your  homes,  on  condition  simply  that  you 


abandon  the  revolt  against  my  rule." 

"  Why,"  cried  Thori  Hart  in  wonder, 
"  we  thought  that  you  made  choice  of  the 
Cross  or  the  sword  to  your  subjects !  Mean 
you  that  we  will  not  be  forced  to  baptism  ?" 

Olaf  smiled  sadly.  "  You  will  not,  Thori. 
All  the  chiefs  in  the  Thrandheim  districts 
have  been  baptized,  but  willingly,  as  those 
with  me  here  can  testify.  Now,  what  is 
your  decision  ?" 

The  two  whispered  together  for  a  minute, 
until  finally  Raud  spoke  up,  advancing  to- 
ward the  King. 

"  You  have  fairly  overcome  us,  King 
Olaf,  and  we  thank  you  for  our  lives.  Still, 
I  am  not  ready  to  accept  your  faith.  I  am 
a  great  priest  of  Thor  in  the  north,  and 
you  seem  to  be  the  champion  of  the  White 
Christ,  so  I  propose  that  you  and  I  pray  to 
our  gods,  and  after  that  we  indulge  in  a 
wrestling  match.  The  winner,  he  who  first 
throws  the  other  to  earth,  shall  bestow  his 
faith  on  all  the  men  of  the  loser.  This 
Thori  and  I  agree  to,  if  you  will  also." 

Olaf,  without  hesitation,  replied,  "  I  will 
accept  the  trial,  here  and  now,  trusting  to 
the  mercy  of  Almighty  God  that  he  will 
nerve  my  arm  against  your  power  and  that 
of  your  false  gods  ! 

"  But  one  condition  I  would  make,  Raud ; 
that  is,  that  whoever  loses  this  contest  shall 
forfeit  his  life  with  it." 

The  viking  joyfully  agreed,  and  then  re- 
turned to  his  camp.  The  men  of  King  Olaf 
had  all  arrived,  and  as  word  of  the  chal- 
lenge passed  through  the  army,  more  than 
one  covert  smile  was  seen,  for  already  men 
said  that  Olaf  was  the  strongest  man  in  all 
the  land. 

It  was  so  bitterly  cold  that  a  great  fire 
was  built,  and  on  one  side  of  the  space, 
scraped  clear  of  snow,  marked  out  for  the 
match,  grouped  Olaf's  men;  on  the  other 
side  the  heathen  followers  of  Raud  stood, 
full  of  confidence  in  their  leader,  for  he  was 
very  strong,  whence  his  name,  and  skilled 
in  wrestling. 


92 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


Stepping  into  the  open  space  between  the 
two  armies,  Olaf  and  Raud  threw  off  their 
helmets  and  armor,  and  took  hold  of  each 
other. 


CHAPTER  XXVI. 

THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 

SIGURD'S  heart  sank  as  he  saw  the 
mighty  muscles  and  powerful  limbs  of 
the  pagan ;  but  he  glanced  at  Olaf,  and 
while  the  latter's  muscles  were  not  so  big, 
he  knew  that  there  was  terrible  strength  in 
them. 

At  first  the  opponents  tried  out  each  other 
carefully;  then,  gradually  warming  up, 
Raud  made  terrific  attempts  to  throw  Olaf, 
but  the  latter  resisted  every  endeavor,  seem- 
ingly without  effort.  Now  was  seen  the  dif- 
ference in  the  two  men's  lives,  for  while 
Raud  speedily  lost  his  wind,  became  flushed 
and  tired,  King  Olaf  looked  as  fresh  as 
when  he  began  the  conflict,  owing  to  his 
temperate  life. 

As  the  viking  weakened,  Olaf  suddenly 
seized  him  by  the  thigh  in  an  unguarded 
moment,  and  with  a  movement  of  his  hands 
flung  the  man  over  his  head.  Amid  a  shout 
from  his  men,  and  a  groan  of  dismay  from 
those  of  Raud,  the  latter  struck  the  ground, 
Olaf  leaping  to  his  side. 

As  t'ie  fallen  man  struggled  up,  the  King 
seized  his  hand  and  aided  him.  "  You 
have  won  fairly,  Olaf,"  gasped  Raud,  look- 
ing with  wondering  eyes  on  his  antagonist, 
"  and  my  life  is  yours." 

"  Nay,"  said  the  King,  kindly,  handing 
the  viking  his  garments,  "  I  seek  no  man's 
blood,  Raud.  All  I  ask  is  that  you  serve 
me  faithfully,  and  you  shall  have  the  same 
lands  that  you  held  from  Hakon." 

Messengers  were  at  once  despatched 
overland  to  Nidaros,  to  tell  of  the  outcome 
of  the  conflict;  then,  after  Raud,  Thori  and 


his  men  had  been  baptized,  for  they  ac- 
cepted the  condition  willingly,  Olaf  em- 
barked his  men  again  and  they  returned 
south. 

The  Firth  was  of  course  closed  again,  so 
the  ships  were  drawn  ashore  for  the  winter, 
and  the  chiefs  of  the  bonders  left  the  King 
for  their  homes,  while  he  pushed  on  across 
the  snow-clad  hills  with  his  own  men.  At 
Ladi  they  crossed  the  ice  to  Nidaros,  and 
were  received  with  much  joy. 

At  Eastertide  the  marriage  of  King  Olaf 
and  Gudrun,  the  daughter  of  Ironbeard, 
was  solemnized  by  Bishop  Sigurd ;  and  at 
the  same  time  Sigurd  Fairhair  and  Astrid 
were  married.  The  wedding  was  a  surprise 
to  no  one,  as  the  whole  court  knew  the  story 
of  their  adventures,  and  had  long  since 
agreed  that  sooner  or  later  the  two  would 
be  wedded. 

Easter  of  this  year  came  late  in  April, 
and  the  Firth  had  been  open  for  some  time. 
As  the  procession  left  the  church  and 
wended  through  the  streets  of  Xidaros  to 
the  great  hall,  a  wonderful  ship  was  seen 
entering  the  harbor.  The  prow  ended  in 
a  dragon's  head,  the  stern  in  the  coils  and 
tail  of  a  dragon ;  both  prow  and  stern  were 
gilded,  shining  bravely  in  the  morning  sun. 
The  hoisted  sail  represented  a  dragon's 
wings,  and  the  glistening  oar  blades  the 
beast's  legs. 

A  cry  of  amazement  went  up  from  all, 
but  the  King  turned,  with  a  smile  at  Sigurd. 

"  This  ship  I  have  had  built  in  secret,  and 
it  is  my  wedding  gift  to  my  faithful  Jarl, 
Sigurd  Fairhair.  It  is  not  fitting  that  a 
Jarl  of  mine  should  be  landless,  so  I  also 
bestow  on  him  the  earldom  of  the  Agdirs, 
and  command  that  he  take  his  wedding  jour- 
ney thither  in  this  his  new  ship !" 

Four  years  later  King  Olaf  Triggveson, 
with  a  few  of  his  ships,  was  entrapped  by 
the  treacherous  Jarl  Sigvald  among  the 
islands  of  Svold  Sound,  while  the  main 
part  of  his  fleet  was  out  at  sea. 


THE  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


93 


THE.  CROSS  AND  THE  HAMMER. 


95 


Here  had  gathered  his  enemies — the 
King  of  Sweden,  King  Svein,  of  Denmark, 
who  had  turned  against  Olaf,  and  the 
heathen  men  of  Norway,  who  had  chosen 
rather  to  leave  the  land  than  to  accept  the 
Cross.  One  by  one  the  King's  ships  were 
taken,  although  he  made  such  a  defense  as 
Norway  had  never  seen,  and  at  one  time  it 
seemed  as  though  he  would  win,  even 
against  such  odds.  Then  Jarl  Eirik,  the 
son  of  Jarl  Hakon,  tore  the  dragon-prows 
from  his  ships,  and  rowed  to  the  attack 
under  the  sign  of  the  Cross. 

As  the  last  of  King  Olaf's  men- fell  on 
his  forecastle,  the  King  threw  aside  his 
shield  and  sprang  overboard.  He  was  fa- 
mous as  a  swimmer  through  all  the  lands 
of  the  north,  and  now  he  dived  deeply, 
swimming  under  the  keels  of  his  enemies' 
ships,  so  that  it  seemed  to  them  that  he 
had  drowned. 

Coming  up  outside  the  ring  of  vessels, 
the  King  swam  swiftly  to  a  fishing  boat  that 
lay  in  by  the  islands,  and  was  pulled 
aboard  by  Sigurd  and  his  wife  Astrid,  who 
had  come  too  late  to  warn  Olaf  of  the  plot 
to  betray  him.  That  night,  with  his 
wounds  bound,  the  King  sat  in  the  stern  of 
the  boat,  which  sailed  swiftly  south. 

Sigurd  urged  Olaf  to  go  north,  offering 
to  take  him  to  his  fleet,  which  could  return 
and  meet  the  invaders,  but  the  King  refused. 

"  No,  my  friends,  I  cannot  do  this.  To- 
ward the  end  of  the  fight  Jarl  Eirik  hoisted 
the  Cross,  and  I  believe  he  made  a  vow 
that  he  and  his  men  would  renounce  the 
old  gods  forever  if  he  conquered  me. 
Therefore,  it  seems  to  me  that  by  the  will 
of  God,  Norway  has  become  Christian  at 
last,  and  also  I  am  not  without  fear  that 
God  has  been  displeased  with  my  rule." 

"  Then  shall  we  go  to  England  with  you? 
You  have  many  great  friends  there,  and 
King  Ethelred,  who  is  almost  driven  from 
his  kingdom  by  the  Danes,  would  gladly 
give  you  a  share  of  his  realm,"  said  Astrid. 
Again  the  King  shook  his  head. 


"  No,"  he  replied,  "  let  me  be  as  dead 
to  the  realm  of  Norway,  for  I  will  never 
trouble  it  again.  I  will  go  to  Rome,  and 
after  that  to  Jerusalem.  There  the  Cru- 
saders rule  the  Holy  Land,  and  I  will  join 
them  and  devote  the  rest  of  my  life  to 
serving  against  the  Moslem.  I  believe  that 
God  used  me  as  an  instrument  for  giving 
his  Word  to  Norway,  and  now  that  this  is 
accomplished,  it  were  best  to  give  peace  to 
this  troubled  realm." 

Seeing  that  it  was  useless  to  urge  Olaf 
further,  Sigurd  sadly  gave  up,  and  two 
days  later  they  arrived  in  his  earldom  of 
Agdir.  Here  the  King  remained  for  two 
weeks,  then,  fearing  that  his  presence 
would  bring  trouble  on  his  old  friends,  de- 
cided that  he  would  at  once  start  on  his 
pilgrimage. 

"  Make  your  peace  with  the  conquerors, 
Sigurd,"  he  said.  "  They  will  be  glad  to  re- 
tain you  in  your  possessions  here." 

With  this  he  selected  a  score  of  men  and 
a  small  ship  of  Sigurd's,  and  departed 
from  Norway  forever.  As  he  and  Sigurd 
and  Astrid  stood  together  on  the  fore- 
castle, just  as  the  anchor  was  raised,  the 
King  said  sadly: 

"  My  friends,  it  is  for  the  best,  believe 
me,  and  now  peace  will  come  to  the  land. 
The  faith  of  Christ  has  been  established, 
and  although  men  may  return  at  times  to 
the  old  gods,  I  think  that  it  will  not  be  for 
long.  Now  take  this  sword  of  mine,  even 
as  you  took  one  long  ago  in  Ireland,  and 
wear  it  in  memory  of  me ;  I  will  never  use 
a  weapon  again,  save  in  defense  of  the 
Holy  Land." 

Embracing  the  King  with  tears.  Sigurd 
and  Astrid  left  the  ship;  and  an  hour  later 
it  was  a  white  speck  far  on  the  horizon. 

"  Come,  Astrid,"  said  Sigurd,  "  we  will 
never  see  Olaf  again;  yet  he  will  always 
be  remembered  as  the  first  King  of  Nor- 
way to  overthrow  the  Hammer  of  Thor, 
and  to  plant  in  its  stead  the  Cross  of 
Christ !"  THE  END. 


University  of  California 

SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

305  De  Neve  Drive  -  Parking  Lot  17  •  Box  951388 

LOS  ANGELES,  CALIFORNIA  90095-1388 
Return  this  material  to  the  library  from  which  it  was  borrowed. 


